JP2022065449A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can further increase the interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes normal game determining means for performing an open/close determination whether or not to change from the closed state to the open state for a startable variable winning device on condition that a game ball is detected by a passing gate, and open mode determining means for determining an open mode to change the state of the startable variable winning device between the open state and the closed state. The normal game determining means can perform the open/close determination on the basis of the game state when the variable display of the normal symbol is started. The open mode determining means can determine the open mode on the basis of the game state when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 137

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a symbol display device when the game ball enters the starting port, and the jackpot game state is controlled on condition that the display result is in a predetermined specific display mode. Based on the so-called type 1 type of pachinko gaming machine) and the entry of the gaming machine into the starting port, the movable member of the variable winning device (large winning opening) is changed from a state in which the game ball is difficult to win to a state in which it is easy to win. , A gaming machine that controls a jackpot gaming state on condition that a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning device enters a specific area provided in the variable winning device is known (so-called two types of gaming machines). ).

In addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening and starting opening, a passing gate for operating a normal symbol is provided in the game area, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed.
When the lottery of this ordinary symbol is won, the movable member (so-called electric tulip) provided at the specific starting port is opened.
And most of the gaming machines equipped with such movable members are to enhance the interest of the game.
It has a time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is easy to open per unit time, and a non-time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is difficult to open per unit time (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-273866

However, for the operation of the movable member provided at the specific starting port, the game ball passes through the passage gate in the time-saving game state, or the game ball passes through the passage gate in the non-time-saving game state. I was only interested in whether it passed, and there were further improvements in order to improve the interest of the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a gaming board (for example, a gaming panel 3100, 4100) in which a gaming region in which a gaming ball flows down is formed, and a starting region (for example, a starting region provided in the gaming region). For example, a starting area detecting means (for example, the first starting port switch 3121) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120) and a passing area (first) provided in the game area.
A passing area detecting means (for example, the first passing gate switch 3127A) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the passing gate 3126A), and an open state provided in the game area where the game ball is easily accepted and a closed state where the game ball is difficult to accept. Whether to change the start variable winning device from the closed state to the open state on condition that the game ball is detected by the variable starting variable winning device (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 3146) and the passing area detecting means. The normal game determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) that determines whether or not to open / close and the normal symbol display device are started to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device. An ordinary symbol display control means (for example, main CPU 201) that controls stop display, and an open mode determining means (for example, main CPU 201) that determines an open mode that changes the start variable winning device into the open state and the closed state. ), And when a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the normal symbol display control means, the start variable winning device is changed to the open state and the closed state by the open mode determined by the open mode determining means. There are special conditions (for example, the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed) triggered by the detection of the game ball by the start opening / closing control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that controls the opening / closing. When it is established, it is provided with a gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 201) that shifts to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a C time-saving gaming state) and controls the shifted gaming state.
The ordinary game determination means makes the opening / closing determination based on the game state when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started by the ordinary symbol display control means, and the opening mode determining means is the ordinary symbol display control means. It is characterized in that the opening mode can be determined based on the gaming state when the specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention uses a start variable winning device detecting means (for example, a second starting port switch 3141) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the starting variable winning device and the starting area detecting means. When the first transition condition (for example, when the stop display mode indicating "big hit" is derived) triggered by the detection of the game ball, the control of the special game advantageous to the player is performed. When the game ball is detected by the first special game control means (for example, the main CPU 201) and the start variable winning device detection means, the second transition condition (for example, the game ball that has entered the V attacker 3152) When the V winning opening is established), the second special game control means (for example, the main CPU 20) that controls the special game is established.
1) and
It is desirable that the second transition condition is set more easily to be satisfied than the first transition condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention determines whether or not to control a special game that is advantageous to the player, on condition that the gaming ball is detected by the starting area detecting means. Special symbol display control that causes the means (for example, the main CPU 201) and the special symbol display device to start variable display of the special symbol, and controls the special symbol display device to stop and display the special symbol after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed. Means (eg, main CPU 201) and
When the game state control means is determined not to control the special game by the special game determination means, and the special symbol display control means stops and displays a specific special symbol (for example, a C time saving symbol or the like). , Specific game state (for example, A time reduction game state, B time reduction game state and C
It is desirable to be able to control the specific gaming state by shifting to the time-saving gaming state) consisting of the time-saving gaming state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is the first of the special symbols, which is longer than the variable display time of the ordinary symbols.
Selection of the variable display time of each special symbol for the variable display time of a plurality of special symbols including at least the variable display time and the second variable display time of the special symbol shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. Multiple variable time tables with different rates (eg, FIGS. 113-1).
Depending on the fluctuation time table storage means (for example, main ROM 202) that stores the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol shown in 16, and the predetermined change conditions (for example, small hit symbol switching information, presence / absence of operation of the limiter function, etc.). , A variable time table determining means (for example, main CPU 201) for determining one variable time table from a plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means, and a special for determining the variable display time of a special symbol. A symbol variation time determining means (for example, main CPU 201) is provided.
It is desirable that the special symbol variation time determining means can determine the variable display time of the special symbol based on the variation time table determined by the variation time table determining means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a special symbol determining means (for example,) for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device according to the determination result by the special gaming determining means.
Main CPU201) and
When it is determined that the special symbol determining means controls the first special game capable of giving the first benefit by the special game determining means, the first special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) is determined. ) Is determined, and when it is determined that the control of the second special game capable of granting the second profit having a lower profit margin than the first profit is performed, the second special symbol (for example, , The symbol of the "feature opening hit" corresponding to the small hit symbol switching information) can be determined, and in the variable time table determining means, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means. Then, when determining the variable display time of the special symbol from the next time onward, a plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means (for example, the normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to (3)). It is possible to determine a special variation time table from the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbol and the variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the special symbol in the C time saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 114 (1) to (3). Is desirable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a special gaming number counting means (for example, main CPU 201) for counting the number of times the special gaming is controlled under a specific condition (A time saving gaming state).
) And,
When a specific number of times (for example, the number of limiters) is counted by the special game number counting means, the game state controlling means can shift to a normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, and the variable time table determining means When a specific number of times is counted by the special game number counting means, the second variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the first variable display time of the special symbol until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is desirable to be able to determine a specific variation time table (eg, variation pattern tables Z1, Z2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116) with a high rate of execution.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game state control means stops and displays the specific special symbol (for example, the C time saving symbol) by the special symbol display control means, the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving symbol) is displayed. For example, it is shifted to the time-saving game state consisting of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, mainly the C time-saving game state), and after the first end condition is satisfied (for example, for example).
When the control of the specific gaming state is terminated and the first special symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means in one special symbol variable display),
After the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state consisting of A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state, mainly A time-saving gaming state), and after the second end condition is satisfied (for example, It is desirable that the control of the specific gaming state is terminated after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol), and the termination condition is different between the first termination condition and the second termination condition.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming board is provided with the starting region in the gaming region in the traveling direction of the gaming ball that has passed through the passing region and in close proximity to the passing region. It is desirable that the gaming ball that has passed through the passing region is configured to be able to pass through the starting region.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the front direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the forward direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the game flow of a pachinko machine. This is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine, and (B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a normal symbol of a first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a type determination table for a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (2) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (4) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start-up initial setting process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the electric power failure processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter determination processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving shift determination process of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition processing of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving setting process of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening winning detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process of changing the jackpot system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process of changing the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the common hit system look-ahead effect form to the big hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the exclusive common hit system look-ahead effect form to the big hit system look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process of changing a reserved image from a dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "Prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the outline of the error in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko gaming machine, it is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal which is output to the outside of the machine according to the gaming state. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. 2 is a flowchart (No. 2) showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the third pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example. Is the first open mode, (B) the open mode of the specific region is the second open mode, and (C) the open mode of the specific region is the third open mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. This is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) another example of the specific area. It is a figure which shows the case where the opening mode is the 1st opening mode, and (B) the case where the opening mode of a specific area is the 2nd opening mode. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in a normal gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbol of the C time saving game state in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the A time-saving gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a type determination table per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern determination process of a special symbol in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the limiter number update process in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning apparatus opening control processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram which shows the transition of the game state in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example of the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory in the normal gaming state in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example of the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory in the C time saving gaming state in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the normal gaming state and the C time saving gaming state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example of the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory in the normal gaming state or the C time saving gaming state in 2nd Embodiment of the 4th pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko gaming machine is directed forward.
The back side of the pachinko machine is in the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is in the left direction.
The right side of the pachinko game machine when viewed from the front is to the right, the upper side of the pachinko game machine is upward, the lower side of the pachinko game machine is downward, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is right. A counterclockwise direction is defined as a counterclockwise direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called one-type pachinko gaming machines called digital pachinko machines. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

Further, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a so-called one-kind type gaming machine called a digital pachi and a two-kind type gaming machine called a wing mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be described in which only one of them is variably displayed without any problem. However, this does not mean that the pachinko gaming machine, which is a type 1 and type 2 mixer in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, is excluded.

In this specification, when the term "special symbol" is simply referred to, it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Further, the "variable display" as used in the present specification is a concept including both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner and "stop display" in which the symbol is stopped and displayed. Yes, the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as "derivative"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter, also referred to as "special symbol lottery") described later or the normal symbol hit determination process. (Less than,
The result of "ordinary symbol lottery") is confirmed. In addition, although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a mode in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not determined (for example, a temporarily stopped mode). However, such an embodiment is included in the above variable display. Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not fixed at this point, so that the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner again.

Further, in this specification, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine.
In explaining the pachinko gaming machine, the case where the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be described as an example. However, the number of special symbols may be one for the first pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variable. When the display is suspended, for example, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol and the first. Pachinko gaming machines that satisfy the starting conditions in the order of winning, including the starting port and the second starting port (hereinafter referred to as
It is called "sequential variable machine").

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in variable display, that it is not in the jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as the fact that the first special symbol is not displayed and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended. Further, in the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the game is not in a big hit game state, and that the second special symbol is variable. It is established when all certain requirements such as display is suspended.

Further, in the sequentially variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in variable display, that it is not in the jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is established when at least all of the fact that the hold is held and that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol are satisfied. Further, in the sequentially variable machine, the starting condition of the second special symbol is that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed.
It is not in a big hit game state, etc., the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and
It is established when at least all of the fact that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied.

In the following, a priority variable machine will be described as an example.

[1-1. Appearance composition]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a dish unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (Fig. 2)
, FIG. 3), board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2).
See) etc. Further, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the dish unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly described, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described. Details will be described later. The above parentheses indicate a reference drawing for a configuration (not shown in FIG. 1).

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the amusement park. A hinge (without reference numeral) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end portion of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as the axis.

The outer frame 2 is connected to the payout unit 8, the board unit 9, which will be described later, via the base door 3.
High strength is required to support a large number of members such as the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, and the dish unit 5. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the effect of production, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be increased in size. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 with, for example, a thin metal plate, the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 are used.
It is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size of the. Especially if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum,
It is also possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a board unit 9 attached to the back surface side, and supports them.

The game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. Further, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, hinges (without reference numerals) are provided at the upper end portion, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion, respectively, and the upper end portion is provided. The glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the middle portion, and the dish unit 5 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, the glass door 4 and the dish unit 5 can be rotated forward integrally or individually with respect to the base door 3 with the hinge as the axis.

Further, the launcher 6 is fixedly attached to, for example, the lower right side of the surface side of the base door 3, and the speaker 32 (see FIG. 2) is fixedly attached to each of the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. There is. From the speaker 32, for example, voice effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, voice notifications, effect sounds such as error notification, and the like are output.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite to the hinge (that is, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member having an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear surface side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 formed in the game board unit 10 (
(See FIG. 4 described later) and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front in a state where the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be attached by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) pieces of glass with a gap between them, or a plurality of pieces of glass are unitized so as to have a gap with each other. You may. Further, when it is unitized, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of, for example, a transparent resin.

Further, at the lower part of the glass door 4, an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player is provided in order to receive the provision of the game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 described above is provided on the upper portion of the glass door 4. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for light emission effect and the like are arranged on the peripheral edge of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and L is arranged in front of these LED groups 46.
An ED cover is provided. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light emitting means for an effect such as notification by light or an effect of emitting light in various variations, but is not limited to the LED as long as such an effect of light emission can be executed, for example, a liquid crystal display, a lamp, or the like. May be.

(Dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unitization of the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52. The dish unit 5 is located in the lower front part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. This dish unit 5
Is configured to be able to be rotated and opened / closed with respect to the base door 3 as described above so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a clerk at a game hall or the like can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, respectively, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper plate 51 is provided so that the game balls can be stored, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, an effect button 54, and the like. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 53 to the upper plate 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "C".
It is called a "HANCE button" or a "push button". The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of a hit determination process of a special symbol. Further, the function of the operation unit 66 may also be used.

The lower plate 52 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 51. Lower plate 5
No. 2 is provided with a payout outlet 55 communicating with the upper plate 51, and the game ball overflowing from the upper plate 51 is paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower plate 52.

An opening (without reference numeral) that can be opened and closed by the operation of the player is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is opened, the lower plate 5 is opened.
The game ball stored in 2 can be transferred to a ball box placed below the lower plate 52. In addition, when the so-called each machine counting system is provided in each machine, not only the ball box is not required, but also the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are stored again. It can also be used for games.

(Launcher)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located at the lower right front of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The launch device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a launch handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and the panel body 61 is configured.
It is placed on the surface side of. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 61, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the launch handle 62 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. When operating the firing handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball.

The game ball launched from the launching device 6 arranged at the lower right of the plate unit 5 is a launch rail (
It rolls in an arc shape along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) via a guide rail 110 (not shown) and is launched into the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, and may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, and the versatility can be enhanced.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100.
The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or one that projects an image using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an identification symbol for effect (for example, a decorative symbol) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, or the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is displayed. An effect image, an effect image during a big hit game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of variable display of a special symbol, and the like are displayed.
In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged so as to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 is attached to the base door 3. It may be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the plurality of display devices are used for the effect. The image may be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. A game ball is supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). A game ball is supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 has a ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80.
Of the game balls supplied to, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to, for example, the upper plate 51. Further, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Various control boards and the like are provided on the board unit 9.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 91 on which the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and the sub control on which the sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. Board 9
2. The payout / launch control board 93 on which the payout / launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of the game ball is mounted, and the power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (FIG. 6 below). A power supply board or the like on which (see) is mounted is provided on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub control board 92, and the payout / launch control board 9
3 and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, and all of these boards are housed in a board case.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs on one board). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of the display control circuit 304, the voice control circuit 305, the LED control circuit 306, and the accessory control circuit 307 (all of which are described later with reference to FIG. 6), which will be described later, are separate substrates. Therefore, the sub control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 10 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. On the front side surface of the game board unit 10, a game area 105 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 110, and a substantially center of the game area 105. The center accessory 115, the first starting port 120, the general winning opening 122, the passing gate unit 125, the special electric accessory unit 130, the second starting port 140, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. 145, LED unit 160, and out port 178
And a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10. note that,
As described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, a guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the game panel 10
All of 0 may be composed of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be composed of the transparent member. Also, the game panel 1
00 may be composed of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be provided in a part thereof to enhance the effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. However, the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent. ..

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral). The game area 105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 110.
The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. Game area 10
The game ball launched toward No. 5 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, in the gaming area 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the left side area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the right side area 107. The definitions of the left side region and the right side region are the same for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, which will be described later.

The game ball launched toward the game area 105 by the launching device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 106 or the right side area 107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 107.

In this specification, as an operation mode (striking method) of the launching handle 62, a striking method of launching a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as “left-handed striking”, and the right side region 107.
The method of firing a game ball so as to flow down is called "right-handed". In this way, it is possible for the player to hit the game ball toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

Further, in the center accessory 115, a warp entrance 117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115.
The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7. The stage 118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 where a game ball can enter is behind the center of the stage 118 in the left-right direction.
Is formed, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is configured to be discharged directly above the first starting port 120. Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 119
Compared to a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119, there is a high probability that the first starting port 120 will be won (passed). There is.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 120, the first starting port switch 121 (FIG. 6 described later).
See). It should be noted that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is detected. Random value for jackpot judgment, symbol random value of the first special symbol, random value for reach judgment of the first special symbol,
Then, various random values such as random values for effect selection of the first special symbol are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as "variation start condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, a random value for determining a big hit of the first special symbol,
The symbol random value of the first special symbol, the reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values such as the effect selection random value of the first special symbol) are referred to as start information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the start information of the first special symbol until the start condition is satisfied is referred to as hold. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General winning opening)
A plurality of general winning openings 122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the general winning opening 122 is not necessarily limited to this.
In place of or in addition to 2, a general winning opening may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side region 107, and is a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is a unit body integrated with 127 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127,
Various data related to ordinary symbols (for example, random values for hit determination of ordinary symbols) are extracted, and up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4) of the extracted various data are stored. The various stored data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left side region 106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is referred to as a starting passage, and various data related to the ordinary symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 (for example, a random value for hit determination of the ordinary symbol). Etc.) is called the start information of the normal symbol. Further, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is satisfied is referred to as hold.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a large winning opening 131, a count switch 132 for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning opening 131 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a special electric accessory 133.
It is a unit body that integrates with. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right side region 107.

The large winning opening 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

Further, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball has won a prize in the large prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the big prize opening 1
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to 31 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for special electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the big winning opening 131 or is easily opened, and cannot win (pass) the game ball to the big winning opening 131. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. In the big hit game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the big hit game state is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. Is.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left side region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120). However, in the second starting port 140, it is difficult or impossible to win a left-struck game ball due to, for example, a game nail, and the second starting port 140 allows the right-struck game ball to win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, the second starting port 14
It is not essential to have 0 in such a configuration, and it may be provided in, for example, the right side region 107.
Further, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is detected. Random value for jackpot judgment, symbol random value for the second special symbol, random value for reach judgment for the second special symbol,
Then, various random values such as random values for effect selection of the second special symbol are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to as "variation start condition of the second special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left side region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120), and when the game balls win (pass), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning opening, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball to the winning opening, and an ordinary electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the above winning opening is the second
The starting port 140 is used, and the above switch is used as the second starting port switch 141.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes, for example, a movable member 147 for electric power, which is a so-called electric chew, and a solenoid for general electric use 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the movable member for general electric power. .. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the movable member 147 for general electric use, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the second starting port 140 or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 140. It is configured to be able to transition to a possible or difficult closed state. The movable member 147 for general electric power includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Out mouth)
The out opening 178 wins any of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 120, second starting opening 140, large winning opening 131, general winning opening 122, etc.) fired toward the game area 105. The purpose is to eject the missing game ball to the outside of the machine. This out port 178 is
Both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball are provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that they can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 122, so that the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. You may do it.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a production accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub control circuit 300. The effect group 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect effect group 58 function as the effect effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see, for example, FIG. 4). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display unit 161, a normal symbol hold display unit 162, a first special symbol display unit 163, a second special symbol display unit 164, and a first special symbol hold display unit. A unit 165, a second special symbol hold display unit 166, a probability change notification display unit 167, and a time saving notification display unit 168 are provided.

(Ordinary symbol display)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, and includes the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the normal symbol") is satisfied, the normal symbol display LED161
The variable display of the normal symbol in which a and 161b are alternately turned on and off is started. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is the normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED161
The combination of lighting and extinguishing of a and 161b is a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned on and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned off. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is lost, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b showing the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the movable member 147 for general electric power is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 is driven. It becomes easy to win (pass) the game ball to.

(Holding display for ordinary symbols)
The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the start information of the normal symbol, that is, the number of variable displays of the normal symbol held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold of the normal symbol") when the variable display is held. It is provided with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of the normal symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, a random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) related to the normal symbol when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected is detected. It refers to the state from the extraction until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. It should be noted that the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not in the variable display and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 1, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol is turned off. Also, if the number of reserved symbols is two,
Both the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols are lit. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 3, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol blinks and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol lights up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is 4, both the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol indicating the number of hold of the normal symbol is not limited to this.

(Special symbol display)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. 1st special symbol display unit 163
Includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group including, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, the eight LEDs 163a to 1 constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 are satisfied.
The variable display of the first special symbol, in which all or part of 63h is repeatedly turned on and off alternately or mutually, is started. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol was started, the first
The variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the big hit game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, the eight LEDs 164a to 1 constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 are satisfied.
The variable display of the second special symbol, in which all or part of 64h is repeatedly turned on and off alternately or mutually, is started. When a predetermined time has passed since the variable display of the second special symbol was started, the second special symbol was displayed.
The variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the big hit game state is determined.

(Holding display for special symbols)
When the start information of the special symbol, that is, the variable display is suspended, the reserved display unit for the special symbol displays the number of variable displays of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols"). It includes a first special symbol hold display unit 165 and a second special symbol hold display unit 166.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, the hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol is held.
It displays the number of hold of the first special symbol, and holds display LED165a for the first special symbol.
, 165b. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that the first starting port 1
After the winning (passing) of the game ball to 20 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted,
The state until the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol is the hold display LED 165a, 165 for the first special symbol.
The number of pending variable display of the first special symbol is displayed by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of b. For example, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is one, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. Further, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 3, the holding display L for the first special symbol
The ED165a blinks and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 4, the holding display LED 165a for the first special symbol
, 165b both blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved, the hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol is held.
It displays the number of hold of the second special symbol, and holds display LED166a for the second special symbol.
, 166b. "The variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that the second starting port 1
After the winning (passing) of the game ball to 40 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted,
The state until the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

The hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol is the hold display LED 166a, 166 for the second special symbol.
The number of pending variable display of the second special symbol is displayed by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of b. For example, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is one, the holding display LED 166a for the second special symbol is turned on and the holding display LED 166b for the second special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol are lit. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 3, the holding display L for the second special symbol
The ED166a blinks and the hold display LED 166b for the second special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 4, the holding display LED 166a for the second special symbol
, 166b both blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of holds of the second special symbol is not limited to this.

(Display unit for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on during execution of the probability change control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probabilistic change notification display unit 167 may be turned on while the probabilistic change control is being executed. However, for example, the probabilistic change control may be turned off so that it cannot be visually recognized that the probabilistic change control is being executed. You may keep it secret that it is running.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of probabilistic control, the backup capacitor 2 described later
With the function of 07, the data indicating that the probability change control is being executed is not lost. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the execution of the probability change control and then the power is turned on, the probability change notification display unit 167 is turned on in such a manner that the probability change control is being performed.

Even if it is concealed whether or not the probability change control is being executed before the power is turned off, when the power is turned on, the probability change notification display unit 167 is turned on. By that
It is configured so that it can be grasped that the probabilistic control is being executed.

(Display unit for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on while the time saving control described later is being executed, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time saving notification display unit 168 is, for example, the first time saving notification display unit 168.
It has a and a second time-saving notification display unit 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display units 168 is not limited to this.

Further, although the details will be described later, the time-saving game state includes the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. Then, for example, the combination of lighting or extinguishing by the first time saving notification display unit 168a and the second time saving notification display unit 168b is configured so that it is possible to grasp which time saving gaming state is.

The time saving notification display unit 168 is the first time saving notification display unit 168a according to the time saving control during execution.
Or / and the second time reduction notification display unit 168b may be turned on, but for example, it is not possible to visually grasp whether or not the time reduction control is being executed or the type of the time reduction control being executed (for example,). By turning on or off all lights, all lights, and modes that are not related to the time reduction control during execution), it is possible to visually grasp whether the time reduction control is being executed and the type of time reduction control being executed. It may be kept secret. In particular, it may be possible to grasp from the appearance whether or not the time saving control is being executed, but it may be difficult to grasp which time saving control is being executed from the appearance, so execution is performed. By keeping the type of time reduction control inside secret, it is possible to enhance the interest.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of the time reduction control, the backup capacitor 2 described later
With the function of 07, not only the data indicating that the time saving control is being executed but also the data indicating the type of the time saving control being executed is not lost. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the execution of the time reduction control and then the power is turned on, the time reduction notification display unit 168 can be visually grasped that the time reduction control is in progress and the type of the time reduction control being executed. Turns on or off.

Before the power was turned off, the power was turned on even if the time reduction control was being executed or the type of the time reduction control being executed was hidden so that it could not be visually grasped. In this case, the time saving notification display unit 168 is configured to be turned on or off in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of the time saving control being executed can be visually grasped.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 shows
It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, a process executed when the power is turned on, a process related to a game operation, and the like, and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read / write memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main ROM 202, the main RAM 203, the initial reset circuit 204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 is a WDT (watchdog) that monitors the operation.
It has a built-in timer) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201. In this embodiment, the main CPU
RAM is used as the temporary storage area of 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 200 has an I / O port 205 connected so as to be communicable with various devices and the like, a command output port 206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, in the main control circuit 200, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, the normal symbol hold display unit 162, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, and the first special symbol hold display unit 165 , The second special symbol hold display unit 166, the probability change notification display unit 167, the time reduction notification display unit 168, the general electric solenoid 148, the special electric solenoid 135, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170, the error notification monitor 172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. Also, the error notification monitor 1
In 72, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting changing process is in progress and a setting checking process indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a code or the like. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a display of a special symbol (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a first start port switch 121 and a second start port switch 141.
, Passing gate switch 127, count switch 132, and general winning opening switch 1
23 etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is I / O port 2
It is output to the main control circuit 200 via 05.

Further, the main control circuit 200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. External terminal board 184, setting key 174 operated when changing or checking the set value if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later
A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 according to the operation of the administrator of the game hall is connected. In the present embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 of the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the payout / emission control circuit 40
It may be configured to be connected to 0 or the power supply circuit 450. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, and a work RAM 3.
03, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like are provided. The sub control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU 30
1 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and image data. Is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 301. The display device 7
The image data to be displayed on the screen includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data indicating a decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 32. The voice control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC is a sub CPU
In response to the voice generation command from 301, one voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the effect group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout / launch control circuit]
The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 400 launches a payout device 82 and a game ball capable of paying out the game balls. Launcher 6 capable of, card unit 180 capable of executing control over ball lending
Etc. are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82, and controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. Although the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side,
It may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 400 applies electric power to the launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the rotation operation of the launch handle 62 in the clockwise direction. It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / emission control circuit 400, and the like.

A power switch 95 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying the power required for the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of the game state. The game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow but a flow that can be grasped by appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball wins a prize in various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120 or the like), the gaming ball The payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a "special symbol game" that uses a special symbol and a "ordinary symbol game" that uses an ordinary symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process of a special symbol is executed based on a winning of a game ball to the start ports 120 and 140, and whether or not to shift to a big hit game state is determined. Further, in the ordinary symbol game, for example, a hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, and the ordinary electric accessory 146 is operated to win a winning opening (second in this embodiment). This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140). In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, and for example, an operation unit such as a normal symbol game or an effect button 54 ( For example, a game or the like for directing using (see FIG. 1) is also included in the "game".

Further, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed). (Until the passage of time) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is derived and then the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the game is considered to be one special symbol game until the end of the big hit game state. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit is not included in the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, but in the pachinko gaming machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the hit determination of the special symbol is included. If the result of the process is derived and then controlled to the small hit game state, one special symbol game is set up to the end of the small hit game state.

When the stop display mode indicating the jackpot in the special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state, the big winning opening 131 is set for a predetermined time (for example, a maximum of 30) due to the operation of the special electric accessory 133.
A round game that is open for 000 msec) is executed, and the possibility of winning a prize in the large winning opening 131 is relatively increased.

Further, in the normal symbol game, the stop display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is the normal symbol display unit 16.
When it is derived to 1, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146, and the possibility of winning the second starting opening 140, for example, is relatively high. Can be enhanced.

The game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game different from these may be able to be executed.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes the first starting port 120 or the second.
Special symbol start prize processing performed when there is a prize (pass) to the start port 140, and
It includes a special symbol control process, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of a special symbol start condition.

When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 120 or the second starting opening 140, the special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, jackpot determination random value, symbol random value, reach determination) from various counters for special symbols (for example, jackpot determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.) Random values for, and various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even while the special symbol control process is being executed.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the hit determination process of the special symbol for determining whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed with reference to the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter of the special symbol. After that, the stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter of the special symbol and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the probability change flag is on, the probability change control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, when the probability variation flag is off, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and when the probability variation flag is on, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively high probability. Is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" is referred to as a "big hit probability".

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the probability change control. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in the game state in which the probability change control is executed (for example, the high probability time-short game state in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a game state in which the probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time short game state).

Next, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the hit determination processing of the above-mentioned special symbol, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is referred to. (Variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the variable display control process of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, the display device 7
For example, a display effect such as a decorative pattern or a character effect displayed in the display area of the speaker 32, and an effect control process such as a sound effect such as a sound or a sound effect output from the speaker 32 are performed. The effect control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the variable display control process and the effect control process of the special symbol are completed, and when it is a big hit, the big hit game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the big hit game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and the game state transition control process to the non-big hit game state that is not a big hit is performed. In this case, the gaming state shifts according to the type of jackpot. For example, when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the big hit type, the game shifts to the high probability time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol includes a small hit, the small hit is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. In addition, if it is not a big hit but it is a time saving hit described later, it shifts to the time saving game state.

Then, each time the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

If a game ball is awarded to the starting ports 120 and 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start winning process is executed. Further, the start information of the special symbol extracted at the time of winning the game ball to the start ports 120 and 140 (for example, the random value for jackpot determination, the symbol random value for the special symbol, the random value for reach determination, and the random for effect selection). Various data such as various random numbers such as numerical values) are held until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the starting information of the special symbol can be reserved up to a total of eight by the four starting information of the first special symbol and the four starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of start information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the start information of the first special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the second special symbol, or the start information of the second special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the first special symbol. You may do it.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is extracted when the game ball is won (passed) to the starting openings 120 and 140 between the time when the special symbol is started and the starting condition is satisfied. Based on the start information, a look-ahead determination (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) for determining a win (whether or not a "big hit" is won) or a fluctuation pattern is performed prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol, and this look-ahead determination is performed. It may be provided with a look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result. The pre-reading determination may be performed before the start information extracted by winning the game ball to the start ports 120 and 140 is reserved, or may be performed after the start information is reserved.

[1-3-2. Ordinary design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol start passing process performed mainly when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and the normal symbol start condition are satisfied. It includes ordinary symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the above.

When the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, start information of a normal symbol (for example, a random value for hit determination of a normal symbol) is extracted (acquired) from a hit determination counter for a normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination random value of the normal symbol extracted from the hit determination counter for the normal symbol, and determines whether or not to set it as "normal symbol hit". The hit determination process of the symbol is executed, and then the variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, and controls the variable display of the normal symbol.
And, the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed. The effect control process may not be executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU
201 determines whether or not the normal hit symbol indicating "normal symbol hit" is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). When it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived, the main CPU 201 executes the game control process for the normal symbol. In this game control process per normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is activated, and a winning ball is won in the winning opening (for example, in the present embodiment, for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)). It becomes an open state where (passing) is possible or easy. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol hit game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In the gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) in which the time reduction control is not executed, the probability that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control is a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the time when the time saving control is not executed, and a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the first prize opening) by operating the ordinary electric accessory 146. 2 Starting port 140 (see Fig. 4)
) Is corresponding to the control in which at least one of the electric support controls for increasing the frequency of opening is performed. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol", the variable display time of the ordinary symbol, and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It is a control to make it. The time saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment).
Winning probability of "normal symbol per", variable display time of ordinary symbol, and / and ordinary electric accessory 1
It refers to the opening pattern of 46 (opening number, opening time, wait time, etc.). Further, improving the time saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball in a winning opening (for example, in the present embodiment, for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)). That is, when the electric support control is executed, the winning probability of "per ordinary symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and / or the ordinary electric accessory is increased as compared with the case where the electric support control is not executed. The winning of prizes is facilitated by 146 (increasing the number of opening times, extending the opening time, shortening the waiting time, etc.).

Then, each time the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

If the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. Further, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is reserved until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in the order in which it is held, and when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the variable display of the start information held first among the start information of the reserved normal symbol is displayed. Run.

In addition, various random values (for example, a random value for big hit determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, a random value for big hit determination of the second special symbol, Second
The extraction method of the special symbol symbol random number value, the second special symbol reach determination random number value, the normal symbol hit determination random number value, etc.) is a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 201. A soft random number method for generating a random number value may be used, or a hard random number method for extracting a random number value from a counter in a random number generator in which a random number is updated at a predetermined cycle may be used.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly classified into a non-big hit game state and a big hit game state. In the non-big hit game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the big hit is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game shifts from the non-big hit game state to the big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the big hit game state. The description of the small hit game state will be omitted.

The non-big hit game state includes a low probability state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be roughly divided.

The high-accuracy gaming state includes a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy high-based) in which the time-saving control is executed. Although not included in the high-accuracy gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 8, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy low-base state) in which the time-saving control is not executed is the high-accuracy gaming state. It may be included in the state.

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state in which the time saving control is not executed (low probability low base) and a time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (low probability high base).

Further, the time-saving game state includes an A time-saving game state, a B time-saving game state, and a C time-saving game state.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that can be changed after the end of a specific big hit game state, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or the game is changed to the big hit game state, the A time-saving game state is changed. finish. When the A time saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the normal game state in principle.

In the B time saving game state, for example, the jackpot game state has ended, the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (that is, the game state in which the probability change flag is off) has started, and the RAM cleared, which will be described later. When the variable display number (for example, the ceiling counter) of the special symbol starting from such a thing reaches the ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), it is a time-saving game state in which the transition is possible, and the specified number of special symbol games are executed. When the game state is changed to the big hit game state, the B time saving game state ends. When the B time reduction game state ends by executing the special symbol game a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the normal game state in principle.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the low probability state is "time saving hit", and can be transferred when the display mode of the time saving hit is derived.
When the special symbol game of the specified number of times determined by winning the "time saving hit" is executed or the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the C time saving gaming state ends. When the C time reduction game state ends by executing the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games, the game state shifts to the normal game state in principle. For example, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games are executed, the C time-saving game state continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed in an overlapping manner, the transition condition to the time-saving gaming state is satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, or the transition condition to the plurality of time-saving gaming states is satisfied at the same time. Doing so is referred to as "overlapping" time-saving gaming states. Then, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the control of the main CPU 201 internally activates any of the overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, the overlapping time-saving gaming states are internally activated. Operating in parallel is called "overlapping execution". However, the main CPU
Even if the 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving gaming states in an overlapping manner, the time-saving control actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving gaming states. That is, even when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player understands that the time-saving game state is controlled to any one of the plurality of time-saving game states.

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be described.

Normal game state, time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state),
And even when the game is controlled to a high-accuracy game state (for example, a high-accuracy time-short game state), if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to shift to any of a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a high-accuracy game state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving game state), depending on the game specifications. However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to a high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state does not shift to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly,
From the short-time game state or the normal game state, the game does not shift to the high-probability game state unless it goes through the big hit game state.

When controlled to the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time saving gaming state unless the jackpot gaming state is passed.
However, since the game shifts to the normal gaming state when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time saving gaming state, it is possible to shift from the A time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Regardless of whether the game is controlled in the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, the game shifts to the normal game state when the specified number of special symbol games are executed. It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving gaming states will be described.

When controlled to the A time-saving game state, the number of times that can be executed in the A time-saving game state is set to be less than the ceiling value that is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state. There is no transition to the time-saving game state. Further, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the big hit game state, the B time saving game state does not shift to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is "time saving hit", the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied, so that the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state may overlap. .. However, as described above, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the big hit game state, the C time saving game state does not shift to the A time saving game state.

When controlled to the B time saving game state, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit".
If this is the case, the condition for shifting to the C time-saving game state is satisfied, and the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state may overlap. Further, even when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time saving game state, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit".
If this is the case, the condition for shifting to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied, and the C time-saving gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state may overlap.

The details of the duplication of time-saving gaming states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time saving control is executed, a high probabilistic time saving gaming state in which both probabilistic change control and time saving control are executed, and time saving control in which probabilistic change control is not executed but time saving control is performed. A low-probability time-saving gaming state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 201 can advance the game in any of these gaming states. However, the gaming state advanced by the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal gaming mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed is the regular gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The sub CPU 301 is
For example, a control is executed in which a striking method, which is regarded as a normal game mode, is displayed in a display area of the display device 7. The "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is not the most disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among the plurality of game modes (for example, the launch mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the above-mentioned setting key 17
For example, setting 1 using 4 or a backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6 for both).
It can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values such as to setting 6. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the set set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag is off (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-shortening game state in this embodiment) in which the probability change control is not executed is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the second special. Regardless of which of the symbol hit determination processes is executed, for example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4
Is about 1/304, setting 5 is about 1/299, and setting 6 is about 1/294. Further, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag for which the probability change control is executed is on (for example, in the high probability time-short game state in this embodiment) is about 1/77 in the setting 1 and about 1/76 in the setting 2. Setting 3
Is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.
It has become.

In addition, unlike the big hit probability, the time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values. For example, the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed is 1/160, and the time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed is 1/140. There is. The time saving hit probability may be different between the case where the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, but it may be the same.

However, even if the time reduction hit probability is a common probability for all the set values, the time reduction continuation rate (for example, the number of time reductions set) may be different depending on the set value. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times is set as the number of time reductions, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. You may do it.

Although the small hit is not included in the lottery target in the first pachinko gaming machine, the small hit may be included in the lottery target. When the small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit probability may be a common probability for all the set values. In addition, when a small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit is won only when the hit determination process of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You may make it available. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not the small hit is won is not performed, whether or not the small hit is won with the small hit probability set to 0. May be an embodiment in which the determination is made.

The above-mentioned time saving hit probability and the small hit probability when the small hit is included in the lottery target are common probabilities for all the set values as described above, but the probability is not limited to this and may differ depending on the set value. good.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for all the set values, but the jackpot probability is not limited to this, and is, for example, the jackpot probability common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, and common to the setting 3 and the setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of set values, such as the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability common to the setting 5 and the setting 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball is controlled to a big hit game state when a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, the winning probability in the specific winning opening may be different according to a set value. It is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol, that is, "time saving hit" based on the big hit determination random value extracted when the game ball wins the starting openings 120 and 140. , "Big hit" or "miss" is a table referred to when determining by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving hit", "big hit" and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first starting port 120 or / and When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the random value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535 (65536 types).
It is extracted from. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted big hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit judgment table of the first special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value. The relationship with the data, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range of the big hit judgment random value determined as "missing". The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is specified.

In this specification, when the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off.
When the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 is "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "missing" based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination, as in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. To decide. In the hit judgment table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value. The relationship with the data, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range of the big hit judgment random value determined as "missing". The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is specified.

In this embodiment, for example, the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol.
When the extracted random value for jackpot determination is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201
Determines as "time reduction hit" and determines the winning determination value data as "time reduction hit determination value data".
Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 is "big hit".
Is determined, and the winning judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted random value for jackpot determination is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 is set to.
It is determined as "missing", and the determination value data is determined as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit".
The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". When the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 is set to ".
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Also, the second
When the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit".
The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random value is 478 to 65535.
If any of the above, the main CPU 201 determines that the data is "missing", and the determination value data is "missing".
It is determined as "missing judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit".
The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random value is 1124 to 6553.
In the case of any of 5, the main CPU 201 determines "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, for example, among the large hit determination random numbers generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is set from 0. It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data) excluding the jackpot judgment value data and the loss judgment value data. Further, the tail end from the predetermined value (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Further, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing so, for example, when the probability change flag is changed from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is increased (or reduced). It is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data) simply by increasing the size.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed and the winning of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the probability different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed is the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making it higher than the winning probability of "", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

However, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is performed. May be. In this case, for example, if the "time saving game state" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is executed repeatedly, and if the "time saving game state" is won just before the end of the time saving game state, the time saving game state is changed. It will be substantially extended, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the "time saving hit" can be won regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state), the main CPU 201 controls the probability variation flag to the time saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving game state", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving gaming state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins at the start ports 120 and 140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "design specification command" is selected. "
The "selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a command for designating a special symbol. This command is used to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display is stopped.
The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU.
201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.
Select.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
For example, the selected symbol command and the symbol specification command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 2
01 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol specification command.
Select. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
Regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main C
PU201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "z" as the symbol specification command.
Select "A7".

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selected symbol command and the symbol specification command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 is set to
Select "z9" as the selected symbol command and select "zA8" as the symbol specification command. If the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU
201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA" as the symbol designation command.
9 ”is selected.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
Regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the winning judgment value data is determined based on the extracted big hit judgment random value with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), and then the special symbol determination table (FIG. 10). 11) is referred to, and the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination and the symbol random value of the special symbol, the winning of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12A shows the main ROM 20 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.
It is an example of the special symbol stop mode determination table stored in 2. The special symbol stop mode determination table is the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.
It is referred to when the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is determined according to the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of, for example, a region of 0 to 7. It is composed of a 1-byte control signal. Each region of 0 to 7 of the first special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, the area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, the area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, the area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, and the area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d. The region 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, the region 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, the region 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163 g, and the region 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to. Corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each region of 0 to 7 of the second special symbol has a one-to-one correspondence with any of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, the area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, the area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, the area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, and the area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d. The second special symbol area 4 corresponds to 164e, the second special symbol area 5 corresponds to 164f, the second special symbol area 6 corresponds to 164 g, and the second special symbol area 7 corresponds to. Corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (display mode per time saving) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. Will be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the above is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.
When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 is the first special symbol display unit 163.
Of the eight LEDs constituting the above, the LED 163a corresponding to the region 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163b corresponding to the region 1 of the first special symbol, and the LE corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol.
It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that D163h is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 has the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. The LED 163c corresponding to 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the region 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off.
It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed. Also, the selected symbol command is "z".
In the case of "7", the main CPU 201 has eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164.
Of these, the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol, the LED 164b corresponding to the area 1 of the second special symbol, and the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on.
It is determined that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 is the second special symbol display unit 1.
Of the eight LEDs constituting 64, the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol, the LED 164c corresponding to the area 2 of the second special symbol, and the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol are included. The second special symbol display unit 16 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.
Decide to stop and display 4.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the special symbol display unit 163
, 164, the LED display mode (big hit display mode) is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 is the LED 16 corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163.
The first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped in such a manner that the 3d, the LED 163e corresponding to the region 4 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163 g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. Decide to display. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CP
Of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, the U201 includes an LED 163d corresponding to the region 3 of the first special symbol, an LED 163f corresponding to the region 5 of the first special symbol, and a first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 has eight Ls constituting the first special symbol display unit 163.
Of the EDs, the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area 4 of the first special symbol.
LED163e corresponding to, LED163f corresponding to the region 5 of the first special symbol, and the first
It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163g corresponding to the special symbol region 6 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. The selected symbol command is "z9
In the case of ", the main CPU 201 includes the LED 164d corresponding to the area 3 of the second special symbol and the LED 164e corresponding to the area 4 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. , The LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, so that the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 is the second special symbol display unit 1.
Of the eight LEDs constituting the 64, the LED 164d corresponding to the area 3 of the second special symbol and the LED 164f corresponding to the area 5 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. 2 Determine to stop and display the special symbol display unit 164.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the special symbol display unit 163
, 164, the display mode of the LED (display mode of loss) is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 is the LED 16 corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163.
It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that only 3h is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 is
Of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, the second special symbol display unit 164 is turned on in a manner in which only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. Decide to display the stop display.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stop mode of the special symbol based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the control signal corresponding to the determined mode is transmitted to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. It outputs to each of the constituent LEDs and controls the stop mode of the special symbol led out to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164.

In FIG. 12A, the LED display mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 and the LED display mode derived to the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable that the control signal is transmitted separately by the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164.

FIG. 12B shows the program RO of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in M. The decorative symbol stop mode determination table is referred to when the decorative symbol stop mode (symbol combination) derived when the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 7 is stopped is determined according to the symbol designation command. Will be done. The "Remarks" column shown in FIG. 12B is shown for convenience for the sake of clarity.

Since only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub CPU 1301 can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is controlled so that the display effect of the special symbol being performed is performed by the display device 7. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display effect in such a manner that it can be grasped whether the special symbol that is variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol displayed on the display device 7 is composed of 9 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 on the left, and 10 symbols, for example, 1 to 9 and a time-saving symbol, on the middle symbol. , The symbol on the right is composed of nine symbols, for example, 1 to 9. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit. By stopping and displaying the middle symbol with the time reduction symbol, the player can grasp that the time reduction hit has been won. Further, in the present embodiment, the odd-numbered symbol is defined as a symbol having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the even-numbered symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small hit, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small hit, for example, the symbol constituting the middle symbol has a small hit symbol. (A symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, the sub CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol with the small hit symbol, so that the player can grasp that the small hit has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol. For example, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at an even number symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time saving symbol.

When the symbol specification command is "zA2" or "zA7" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "zA2".
In the case of "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the left symbol and the right symbol at an odd number symbol, and stops the middle symbol at a time saving symbol, for example, as a stop mode of the decorative symbol. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), the symbol designation command is "z2" or "z8", as can be seen with reference to FIG. 13 described later. Compared with the case of "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z7"), the number of time reductions set is large, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol specification command is "zA3" or "zA8" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "zA8".
In the case of "big hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol with an odd number of identical symbols (doublet) as a stop mode of the decorative symbol.

When the symbol specification command is "zA4" or "zA9" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "zA9".
In the case of "big hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol with a uniform symbol (doublet) of an even number symbol as a stop mode of the decorative symbol. As can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" is used when the probability change flag is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game state (when the selected symbol command is "z4"). There is a case where the probability change flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub CPU 301 controls to stop the decorative symbol at the even-numbered identical symbols (doublet). In the big hit game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that the hit is a probability change hit (a hit in which the probability change flag is set to ON).

Further, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later. Compared to the case of "", the expected value that the probability change flag is set to on after the end of the big hit game state is small. In this respect, the symbol specification command is "zA3".
Or, when it is "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol at a break. The loose stitch corresponds to, for example, a stop mode in which at least one of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol is different from the other symbols.

In FIG. 12B, the decorative symbol stop mode corresponding to the symbol designation command (for example, when the symbol designation command is “zA1”, the left symbol “2”, the middle symbol “time reduction”, and the right symbol “4”) is displayed. Although illustrated, the stopping mode shown in the column of the stopping mode of the decorative symbol in FIG. 12B is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the jackpot game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or / and the mode of the subsequent game state, depending on the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. It will be referred to when making a decision. The mode of the gaming state after that shows the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving gaming state without being controlled to the big hit gaming state, so that the mode of the subsequent gaming state is the C time saving gaming state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number to 10 times. The selected symbol command is "
In the case of "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 50 times. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CP
U201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 100 times. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned display mode of the time reduction hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then the main CPU 201 derives the display mode. Without controlling to the big hit game state, the time saving flag is set to on and the determined time saving number is set, and it becomes possible to control to the C time saving game state. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the big hit gaming state is not determined because it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. It is supposed to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set number of time reductions may be different depending on the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time saving gaming state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". For example, in the main CPU 201, the probability change flag is on (high probability game state).
Even if it is, as shown in FIG. 10, a lottery for "time saving hit" is performed, and if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it indicates that the "time saving hit" has been won. Although the display mode of is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, it is not controlled to the C time saving game state.
You may try to continue the high probability gaming state.

Further, the main CPU 201 performs a lottery of "time saving hit" when the probability change flag is on, and even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to the special symbol display unit. It may be derived to 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the big hit judgment random value, that is, the hit that does not include "time saving hit" in the lottery result (result of the hit judgment processing of the special symbol). The determination process may be performed. In this case, when the probability variation flag is off, the time saving hit determination value data is assigned to the jackpot determination random value, and when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the width of the random number value assigned to the time saving hit judgment value data when the probability variation flag is off is the loss judgment value data, the big hit judgment value data, or the loss judgment value instead of the time saving hit judgment value data. It is assigned to both the data and the jackpot judgment value data.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variation flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", It may be possible to shift to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 20
1 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as an aspect of the jackpot gaming state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10,000 times.
In these cases, the main CPU 201 uses the special symbol display unit 16 to display the above-mentioned jackpot display mode.
After deriving to 3,164, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and after the end of this big hit gaming state, it is possible to control to the high accuracy time and short gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to ON, and that both the probability variation number and the time reduction number are set to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 2
After deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, the 01 controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it becomes possible to control the high accuracy time-shortening gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON.
In addition, it is decided to set the number of time reductions to be set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, and can control the jackpot gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the big hit game state. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. Further, it is decided to set the number of time reductions to be set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot gaming state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, and can control the jackpot gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is also the A time-saving gaming state.

The time saving performance in the highly accurate time saving gaming state is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 is in the mode of the big hit gaming state and None of the subsequent aspects of the gaming state are set. That is,
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 201 continuously controls the game state up to that point without shifting the game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the mode of the big hit gaming state and the subsequent mode as described above. Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 13.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 10, and the big hit determination is extracted when the game ball wins the first start opening 120 or the second start opening 140. The winning judgment value data is determined based on the random value (winning judgment is performed), and the winning judgment value is determined.
Determine the win (“short hit”, “big hit” or “miss”). After that, the main CPU
Reference numeral 201 denotes a symbol random value of a special symbol extracted when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 120 or the second starting opening 140, and the above-mentioned winning determination value data, with reference to the special symbol determination table of FIG. The selected symbol command is determined based on the above, and the type of display mode (type of time saving hit or type of jackpot) derived from the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the confirmation display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5").
, Or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. Times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z")
8 ”). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction gaming state is higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time-saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased.

Instead of setting the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction gaming state to be higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state. May be set to be higher than the expected value of the number of time reductions in the time reduction game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. This Figure 1
In 4, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (selection symbol command is "z5",
In the case of "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0") and 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z".
7 ”) or 200 times (when the selected symbol commands are“ z2 ”and“ z8 ”).
In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving gaming state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

In the present specification, as in the case of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag is off when the value of the time saving flag is "0", and the time saving flag is turned on when the value of the time saving flag is "1".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability change flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the time saving control.

The time reduction number is a variable display number of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time reduction control. That is, for example, when the number of time reductions is determined to be "50", if the special symbol is variably displayed 50 times without winning a big hit in this time reduction game state, this time reduction game state ends and the non-time reduction game ends. It shifts to a state (for example, a normal game state).

The probability variation number and time reduction number "10000" shown in FIG. 13 and the like mean that the probability variation control can be continuously executed after the jackpot gaming state ends until it is determined to be a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot). ..

[1-4-6. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. "Remarks" in FIG.
The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C shown in the column of are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). Similarly, the jackpot system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A, B, C, D
, E are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit or a big hit. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variation flag is off, and the variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Determine the variation pattern. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 15 is a table referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol of S96 of FIG. 28, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random value for reach determination, or /. And, it is determined based on a random number value for effect selection and the like, but the determination is not limited to this, and may be determined based on another value or the like in place of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the effect selection random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability variation flag is on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

The main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (so that the look-ahead effect is performed) even when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on. Further, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the look-ahead flag may be set (so that the look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The determined fluctuation pattern information is transmitted to the main CPU 20 via the command output port 206.
It is transmitted from 1 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different for each set value, for example, by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

Further, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to whether or not the time reduction flag is on regardless of the type of time reduction. , Not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be different depending on the type of time reduction. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared as the time-saving game state. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

The time-saving game state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". Is. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state is to win a big hit (a big hit whose selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the A time-saving gaming state is satisfied instead of always transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state (for example, when the backup is cleared). Etc.), do not shift to the A time saving game state.

Further, the end condition of the A time saving game state is determined in response to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the case where the selected symbol command is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "A time reduction specified number of times") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, it is the case where any of the conditions is satisfied.

The B time-saving gaming state starts from, for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high-accuracy gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) starts. As a result, the ceiling counter is updated (1 addition), and the time-saving gaming state is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the condition for shifting to the B time saving game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time saving game state may be made when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final change") is started, or when the ceiling final change is completed. This may be the case when the variable display of the next special symbol of the final fluctuation of the ceiling is started. That is, the timing of transition to the B time reduction gaming state may be any time between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, the result of the hit judgment processing of the special symbol in the final fluctuation of the ceiling is "
In the case of "loss", although the display mode of the loss is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the game shifts to the B time saving game state. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays to the player that the condition for transitioning to the B time saving game state is satisfied (for example, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value in the present embodiment) (for example, the decorative symbol is a special symbol). You can stop it with
You may control to display the special effect by the character, or the effect in which both of them are performed) on the display device 7. Even if the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied instead of always transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state (for example, special in the ceiling final change). When the result of the hit determination process of the symbol is a big hit, etc.), the game is not shifted to the B time saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability change flag is on, and is always counted when the probability change flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game is controlled to the B time saving game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit". In a pachinko gaming machine that includes a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the display mode of the small hit. The B time-saving gaming state may be started when is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, or the B-time saving gaming state may be started after the end of the small hit gaming state. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the display mode of the small hit is only displayed on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. , The display effect indicating to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above is not displayed. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the set value. In addition, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "big hit".
In the case of, the game is controlled to the big hit game state without being controlled to the B time reduction game state.

The ceiling counter is R when the power is turned on and when the jackpot game state is controlled.
When the work area (volatile area) in AM203 is cleared (backup clear process), a switch different from the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 17) is performed.
4 or a dedicated switch) is operated, and in a gaming machine capable of changing the normal symbol hit probability, it is reset when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the high probability of the normal symbol hit probability ends. Then, when the ceiling counter is allowed to be updated, each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed,
The ceiling counter is updated. For example, if the probability change flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. The ceiling value is calculated each time the ceiling counter is cleared.
It may be set by the main CPU 201, or it may be predetermined as a pachinko gaming machine-specific one instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 is at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol unless the probability change flag is turned on after the end of the jackpot game state. Update the ceiling counter (+1). Also, if the probability change flag is on after the end of the big hit game state, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if the special symbol is variablely displayed. Updates the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol after is turned off. In addition, in the case of the specification that performs the probability change fall lottery, the probability change flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol If the probability change flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications in which the probabilistic fall lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the sub CPU 301 has an effect suggesting that the probabilistic fall lottery has been won, or a high probability game. It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting a transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, the display device 7 indicates the start time of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the transition timing to the B time reduction game state.
It becomes difficult for the player to grasp the game based on the display effect displayed on the screen, and it becomes possible to provide an interesting game property. When it is difficult to grasp the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state or a countdown effect of Gase is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , It will be possible to further enhance the interest.

Further, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of the special symbol after the clear process in the work area in the RAM 203. Update the ceiling counter (+1) at the hour or end.

Further, a switch different from the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 17).
When 4 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated (4 or a dedicated switch).
+1).

Further, the end condition of the B time saving game state is the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "the following"). This is the case where one of the conditions is satisfied, that is, the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) for (referred to as "B time reduction specified number of times") is executed. "When the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions is executed", which is one of the end conditions of the B time reduction game state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of B time reductions (hereinafter, "B time reduction final change"). ")
May be started, or B time reduction final fluctuation may be completed. That is, the end timing of the B time reduction game state may be from the start of the B time reduction final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the B time reduction final variation.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit". That is, the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is that the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is a time saving hit of "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8") is won, and the display mode of the time saving hit is a special symbol. It is derived (confirmed display) to the display units 163 and 164.
Even if the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the condition for hindering the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied instead of always transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state (for example, the B time-saving gaming state). If the specification is such that the C time-saving game state is not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), C
Do not shift to the time-saving game state. In addition, when the condition for hindering the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied even though the transition condition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 hits the time-saving even though the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is not satisfied. Display mode of special symbol display unit 163
, 164 is executed.

Further, the end condition of the C time saving game state is determined according to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started, and the case where the selected symbol command is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the set number of time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction specified number of times") is executed (see the column of "number of time reductions" in FIG. 13). Of the above, it is the case where any of the conditions is satisfied. As for the C time reduction specified number of times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time reduction game state, the variable display of the special symbol of the time reduction number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction final variation") starts. It may be when it is done, or when the C time reduction final fluctuation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time saving game state is
It may be between the start of the C time reduction final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the C time reduction final variation.

The time saving performance may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. Further, of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the two time-saving game states is the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving game states and the other one time-saving game state It may be different from the time saving performance. Further, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

Further, in addition to the above, for example, the variable display number of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times as the end condition of the A time reduction game state, the end condition of the B time reduction game state, and the end condition of the C time reduction game state. Alternatively, it may be included that the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened a predetermined number of times, a specific opening mode is selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, and the like. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, the fact that the number of small hits has reached the specified number of times may be included in the above-mentioned end condition. Further, a time-saving fall lottery may be performed, and the fact that the time-saving fall lottery has been won may be included in the above-mentioned termination condition.

[1-4-8. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The hit determination table of the normal symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, that is, the game state and the hit determination of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when determining "per ordinary symbol" or "missing" by lottery based on the random value value (that is, when executing the ordinary symbol game determination process of S295 of FIG. 43 described later). ..

As described above, the hit determination random value of the ordinary symbol is a random value used in the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a hit determination random value of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "hit the normal symbol" or "missing" based on the extracted random value for hit determination of the normal symbol.
In the hit judgment table of the normal symbol, the range (width) of the random value for hit judgment of the normal symbol determined as "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit judgment value data are displayed in the hit judgment table of the normal symbol. The relationship and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit determination random value of the ordinary symbol determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data are defined.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 is in a non-time saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state).
If the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is any of 0 to 79, it is determined to be "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is determined to be "ordinary symbol hit judgment value data". Further, in the non-time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the A time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that if the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 98, it determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". It is decided to be "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the A time saving game state, when the hit determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 determines “missing” and determines the determination value data as “missing determination value data”.

Further, in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that if the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 79, it determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". It is decided to be "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that if the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 79, it determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". It is decided to be "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 80 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

As described above, in this embodiment, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (shown in FIG. 16). Selection rate (approximate)) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-shortened gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-short-time gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

It should be noted that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-time-saving game state, the B-time-time-saving game state, and the C-time-time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to make the ratio of the types of ordinary symbols, which will be described later, different for each state without changing the winning probability per ordinary symbol.

[1-4-9. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol judgment table includes the type of time reduction, the above-mentioned winning judgment value data, and the passing gate 12.
When selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through 6 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referenced by. The "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the normal symbol hit symbol determined according to the normal symbol hit type when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random value of a normal symbol is, for example, 0 to
Extracted from 99 (100 types).

According to the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when the ordinary symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the ordinary symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. To.

For example, in the non-time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, even if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 99.
The main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz1" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69, "fz" is selected as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol.
2 ”is selected, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 70 to 99,“ fz3 ”is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz4" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69, "fz" is selected as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol.
5 ”is selected, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 70 to 99,“ fz6 ”is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz7" as the symbol command to select when hitting a symbol, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69, "fz" is selected as the symbol command to select when hitting a normal symbol.
8 ”is selected, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 70 to 99,“ fz9 ”is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first determines the winning determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value by referring to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). After that, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol by referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17).
Not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random value of the normal symbol, the winning of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of hitting the normal symbol may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Ordinary symbol per type determination table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol hit type determination table sets the open pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 executed in the variable display start process of the ordinary symbol of S293 in FIG. 43, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, the selected symbol command at the time of hitting a normal symbol is "f".
In the case of "z0", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to be the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. That is, it is determined to be an opening pattern in which the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

Further, when the selected symbol command at the time of hitting a normal symbol is "fz1", the main CPU 201 is set to
The opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time 2
It is determined that the wait time is 200 msec and the second opening time is 2000 msec.

Further, when the selected symbol command at the time of hitting a normal symbol is "fz2", the main CPU 201 is
The opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time 2
It is determined that the wait time is 500 msec, the wait time is 200 msec, and the second opening time is 2500 msec.

Further, when the selected symbol command at the time of hitting a normal symbol is "fz3", the main CPU 201 is
The opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time 3
It is determined that the wait time is 200 msec and the second opening time is 3000 msec.

Also, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz4" or "fz7",
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to have a first opening time of 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

Also, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz5" or "fz8",
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to have a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

Also, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz6" or "fz9",
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to have a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the non-time saving game. Among the open patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving gaming state, the most advantageous degree is the disadvantageous aspect.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, and the B time saving. Among the open patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 146 in the gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, the most advantageous degree is the advantageous mode.

Further, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the hit determination of the normal symbol in the C time saving game state. The degree of advantage is the same as that of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "per ordinary symbol", but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 19 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol executes the variation pattern determination process of the ordinary symbol which is executed in the variable display start process of the ordinary symbol of S293 of FIG. 43 described later when determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. When) is referred to. The main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the normal symbol, and is normal based on the game state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The random value for normal symbol effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time saving game state, the random value for normal symbol effect selection is 0 to 99.
In any case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving game state is the longest among the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 90 to 99. If it is one of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 800 mse.
Determined to c.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. In the case of any of, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 1000 ms.
When it is determined by ec and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

Further, in the C time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. In the case of any of, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 1000 ms.
When it is determined by ec and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal symbol per variable display is the non-time saving game state, A.
Of the variable display times of the normal symbols in the time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time saving gaming state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to the time-saving game state]
[1-5-1. Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction]
In the above description, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. However, not limited to this, the number of time reductions set when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the hit determination processing of the special symbol is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include "time saving hit". In this case, although the main CPU derives the display mode per time reduction to the special symbol display unit, it does not execute the control to shift to the time reduction gaming state, but continuously controls to the high accuracy gaming state. By the way, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called ST machine, which turns the probability change flag from on to off when the variable display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the final game as the high probability gaming state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is later, the main CPU may control the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Overlapping time-saving game states]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state overlap. When the time-saving game states are overlapped in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving gaming states may not be overlapped (that is, "time-saving hit" may be ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. It is stipulated.

When the time-saving game states are overlapped, a mode in which the time-saving game states are overlapped and a mode in which the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. A mode in which time-saving game states are repeatedly executed]
As a mode in which the time-saving game states are repeatedly executed when the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game is won in any one of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. Occasionally, it is conceivable that the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed and the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B, and the time saving game state C, the main CPU 201 is the special symbol display unit 163,
In 164, the display mode per time reduction is derived. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts the one having a large number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied while maintaining the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state as the time-saving number of times.

For example, if the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state is larger than the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit", the main CPU 2
The 01 controls the time-saving game state until the remaining number of times in the A time-saving game state is exhausted, unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state. To explain by giving specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 200 times, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50. In the case of times, although the display mode of the time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the time reduction number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. 200 times. Therefore, even if the "time reduction hit" is won in any one of the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, and the time reduction game state C, the appearance of the time reduction number and the time reduction performance is "time reduction". It is the same as the case where the A time saving game state is continued without winning the "hit".

On the other hand, for example, if the "time reduction hit" is won in the A time reduction game state and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is larger than the time reduction remaining number in the A time reduction game state, the main CP.
U201 will maintain the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, unless a "big hit" is derived.
It controls the time saving game state until the number of time saving times set based on the "time saving hit" is exhausted. To explain by giving specific numbers, for example, when the number of remaining time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 20 times, the "time reduction hit" is won, and the number of time reductions that can be executed based on this "time reduction hit" is 50.
In the case of times, the number of time reductions from this point is 50 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the A time reduction game state. That is, it is the number of remaining time reductions in the A time reduction game state 2
Even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 0 times, after that, the variable display of the special symbol is further executed 30 times of the difference between the two while maintaining the time saving performance in the A time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-2. A mode in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but in the following, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes the small hit will be described. ..

First, a case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit" or "missing" in the final change of the ceiling will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, if the remaining time reduction number in the C time reduction game state is larger than the B time reduction specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. Unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example,
When the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and B
When the specified number of time reductions is 200 times, the number of time reductions from this point is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state, the appearance of the time reduction frequency and the time reduction performance is the same as the case where the C time reduction game state is continued without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. ..

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time reduction game state and the B time reduction specified number of times is larger than the time reduction remaining number in the C time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. However, unless a "big hit" is derived, the game is controlled to a time-saving game state until the specified number of times of B time-saving is exhausted. Explaining with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time reductions that can be executed in the B time reduction game state is 300 times. In this case, the number of time reductions from this point is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, after that, the special symbol is executed over 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time reduction performance in the C time reduction game state. The variable display of is further executed.

When the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final change of the ceiling, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss", the loss display mode is derived. .. When the small hit display mode is derived, it is controlled to the small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final change, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final change, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are. The case where it holds will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts the control of the B time saving game state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Special symbol display unit 163, 1
Different controls can be executed depending on whether the control of the B time saving game state is started after being derived to 64.

First, when the control of the B time saving game state is started before the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is derived to the special symbol display unit 163, 164, the display mode of the time saving game is the special symbol display unit 163,
By the time it is derived to 164, it is already controlled to the B time saving game state. Therefore, main C
The PU201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless a "big hit" is derived, the time saving game is performed until the larger of the B time saving specified number of times and the C time saving game state is consumed. Control to state.

Next, when the control of the B time saving game state is started after the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time saving game is the special symbol display unit 163 and 164.
At the time of being derived to 164, it is not yet controlled to the B time saving game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 satisfies the end condition of the time-saving game state (for example, derivation of a big hit display mode, derivation of a small hit or a specific small hit display mode, etc.) while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. Unless otherwise specified, the control is performed in the time-saving game state until the larger number of time-saving times, the B time-saving specified number of times and the time-saving number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, is exhausted. In this case, when the end condition of the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving performance is maintained or executed is satisfied, the time-saving gaming state may be terminated.

In addition, when the transition condition to the B time reduction gaming state and the transition condition to the C time reduction gaming state are satisfied in the final change of the ceiling, the sub CPU 301 performs the B time reduction when only the transition condition to the B time reduction gaming state is satisfied. A special display effect different from the transition display effect and the C time reduction transition display effect performed when only the transition condition to the C time reduction gaming state is satisfied may be performed. Further, instead of this, for example, when the time saving performance in the B time saving game state is maintained, the B time saving transition display effect is performed, and when the time saving performance in the C time saving game state is maintained, the C time saving transition display effect is performed. Etc.
Either the B time reduction transition display effect or the C time reduction transition display effect may be given priority.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and the B time saving game. It controls the jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time saving performance when executing multiple time saving game states in layers]
In the above, the embodiment in which the C time-saving gaming state is superimposed on one time-saving gaming state and the mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is superimposed on the C time-saving gaming state have been described.

When the specifications are such that a plurality of time-saving game states can be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In pachinko gaming machines with such specifications, the time saving performance of multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in layers may be different, but the time-saving performance of multiple time-saving gaming states that can be executed in layers may be the same. preferable.

For example, in the case of a specification in which the C time saving game state can be executed by superimposing the C time saving game state on the one time saving game state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the one time saving game state and the time saving performance of the C time saving game state are the same. Further, when the specifications are such that the B time-saving game state can be superimposed on the C time-saving game state, it is preferable that the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state are the same.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine having specifications that allow a plurality of time-saving gaming states to be executed in an overlapping manner, for example, a time-saving gaming state that can be executed later in addition to the previously executed time-saving gaming state is executed first. It may be provided with one time saving performance which is the same as that of the current time saving gaming state, and another time saving performance different from this one time saving performance. Then, when the time-saving game state is executed in combination with the time-saving game state executed earlier, one time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving gaming state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state. If it is not executed repeatedly, another time saving performance may be activated.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that can execute the B time-saving game state by superimposing the C time-saving game state on the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the same as that of the C time-saving game state, and this one time-saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances with other time-saving performances different from the performance are provided. Then, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, one time saving performance is activated, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, for example, in the normal gaming state which is not in any of the time saving gaming states, the other time saving performance is activated. May be activated.

[1-5-3. A mode in which the time-saving game states are not repeatedly executed]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly, a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state. It is conceivable that even if the time-saving gaming states overlap, the time-saving gaming states are not executed repeatedly (hereinafter referred to as "the latter aspect"). In the latter aspect, even if one of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state is won in the time-saving game state, this is ignored and the C time-saving game state is repeated. Two modes are conceivable: a mode in which the game is not executed, and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, this is ignored and the B time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly. The above two aspects considered as the latter aspect will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is not superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B, and the time saving game state C, as described above, the main CPU 201 is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164. , Derive the display mode per time reduction. However, the main CPU 20
1 is one time-saving game state without being controlled to C time-saving game state based on "time-saving hit" unless the last special symbol in one time-saving game state is variable display (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving final fluctuation"). Until the remaining number of time reductions is exhausted, the game is controlled to one time reduction game state. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the time-saving final fluctuation) is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if you win the "time saving hit" in the time saving final fluctuation in one time saving game state,
In the main CPU 201, one time-saving game state ends before the time-saving hit display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, and the time-saving hit display mode is the special symbol display unit 163.
, 164 can execute different controls depending on the case where one time-saving game state ends when it is derived.

First, when one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of time-saving hit, and then C.
Start controlling the time-saving game state.

Next, when one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164, that is, the derivation of the display mode of time-saving hit and the end of one time-saving gaming state are determined. When the interrupt processing is performed within the same interrupt processing, the main CPU 201 may or may not start the control of the C time saving game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode per time saving is performed before the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time saving hit before the ending process of one time saving gaming state is a condition that hinders the transition to the C time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirming display) the display mode of the time saving hit is performed after the ending process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls to the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance in one time saving game state, but makes it the time saving performance in the C time saving game state. That is, the main CPU
In 201, if the end processing of one time saving game state is not processed at the time when the display mode of time saving hit is derived, one time saving game state is ended without controlling to C time saving gaming state, and one time saving game state is finished. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, the C time reduction game state is controlled.

[1-5-3-2. A mode in which the B time-saving game state is not superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 corresponds to the display mode (that is, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Take control.

First, in the final change of the ceiling, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "missing" will be described.

In the C time saving game state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "loss", the main CPU 201 consumes the remaining time saving number of times in the C time saving game state. Until it is done, it is controlled to the C time saving game state.

However, if the number of remaining time reductions in the C time reduction game state is 0 in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main C
The PU 201 may or may not start the control of the B time saving game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed before the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state and controls the B time reduction game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time reduction game state is performed after the start processing of the B time reduction game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time reduction game state without controlling the B time reduction game state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving game state, if the end processing of the C time saving game state is not processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state is finished. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, the game state is controlled to the B time reduction game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time reduction game state after the start processing of the B time reduction game state is a condition that hinders the transition to the B time reduction game state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit" in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and starts controlling the big hit game state.

[1-6. Main control process]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23, the main process executed by the main CPU 201 (
Main control main processing) will be described. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control main process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure signal is at the High level (S).
11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

When it is determined in S11 that the power failure signal is not at the High level (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power failure signal is at the High level (S11 is Y).
(In the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the backup clear switch 176 is turned on / off and the setting key 174 is turned on / off. That is, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are turned on /
The off state is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Further, in this process, the game permission flag is set to off. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the start wait on the sub control circuit 300 side is performed. The start-up waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 1200.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start, the main CPU 201 may, for example, check the interrupt request signal, output the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initialize various sensors at predetermined timings. The output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before startup (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, it is determined whether the power failure is normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S14 that the power failure is not normal (NO in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S18.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S14 that the power is normally cut off (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then works. Collate the checksum value of the area (S16)
.. After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the collation result is abnormal.

When the collation result is not abnormal in S17, that is, it is determined to be normal (S17).
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, it is not normal (
(When the determination in S17 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, N
An O determination is made, and a YES determination is made when both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and when either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is off.

When it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (S18 is NO).
(In the case of determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S21. The processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (when the determination in S18 is YES).
The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process is performed on the I / O port 2 where the signal is output to the performance display monitor 170.
Set the error display data in the output port of 05. As a result, the predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error display is performed. The main CPU 201 is S2
After executing the process of 0, it enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the collation result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch Until it is determined that both of the 176 are on, the game cannot be executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating that the setting has been changed in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and the value indicating that the setting is changed is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 performs the process S2.
Move to 2.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, based on the value of the start control flag stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203,
Judge the current startup status (return to power failure / change setting / check setting / clear RAM). Main C
After executing the process of S23, the PU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is cleared (
For example, work area construction and address setting) are performed. It should be noted that this process is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared.
After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs a startup initial setting process. In this process
Initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear). The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.
The main CPU 201 transfers the post-processing after executing the processing of S25 to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt prohibition process. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power interruption process. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 27, the process is transferred to S28. For details of the power interruption process, see FIG.
It will be described later with reference to 5.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, the initial value random number of various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) is updated. The main CPU 201 executes the process of S28 and then performs the process of S29.
Move to.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

When it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. Main CPU 2
01 transfers the processing to S32 after executing the processing of S31.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor aggregation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. In addition, this process is performed in the main RAM 2
It is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in 03. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S32, the process is transferred to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 ms, which is three times the interrupt cycle (eg, 2 msec).
ec.

When it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the processing of S26 and performs the processing after S26.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35).
(In the case of determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt-prohibited section in the main control main process. Main C
After executing the process of S36, the PU 201 shifts the process to S37.

In this embodiment, in the main control main process, for example, an interrupt prohibition section (S) of 6 msec is performed before the execution of various processes related to the game control (for example, the processes of S37 to S44) described later.
The processing section of 26 to S35) is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.
After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission / reception processing. In this process, a command transmission / reception process for payout control is mainly performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 38, the process is transferred to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, a process related to the special symbol game is performed. For details of this special symbol control process, see FIG.
It will be described later with reference to 6. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 performs the process S4.
Move to 0.

In S40, the main CPU 201 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process,
Processing related to the normal design game is performed. The details of this ordinary symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 performs the process S.
Move to 41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game operation display unit control process. In this process, each display unit of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second
The display data to be output to the special symbol display unit (164, etc.) is set. Main CPU 2
01 transfers the processing to S42 after executing the processing of S41.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal board pulse signal control process, output data setting process, test firing test signal generation process, and the like are performed. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a state monitoring process. In this process, launch position determination process, game abnormality detection determination process, payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), the launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

When it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (S5).
(When 2 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S53, the initial setting process at startup is terminated, and the process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clear (when S54 is NO determination), the main CP
U201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S56, the initial setting process at startup is terminated, and the process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power failure processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power interruption process performed in S27 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is on (S).
61).

When it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power interruption process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIG. 20).
-See Fig. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (S61 is Y).
(In the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a checksum value calculation process. Main C
After executing the process of S62, the PU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in the corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203, respectively. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the XINT detection flag. Then, after executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs the RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU 201
Transfers the process to S72 after executing the process of S71.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 is used to execute the special symbol control process.
Prior to the processing of S71, an address setting processing is performed in which the address of the work area or the like of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the demo display command. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives the demo display command,
The sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S72 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S75.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S72 is YE).
(In the case of S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start.
That is, it is determined whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 201
Moves the process to S74.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU.
201 shifts the processing to S75.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start.
That is, it is determined whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S74 is NO), the main CPU 201
Ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S74 is YES), the main CPU.
201 shifts the processing to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 23).
See).

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S).
It is preferable to perform 71 to S75) within the interrupt disabled section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, the special symbol management process has a higher priority than the second special symbol (
It may be a priority variable machine in which S75) is executed, or the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 1
It may be a sequentially variable machine in which special symbol management processing is executed in the order of winning a prize in 40.

[1-6-5. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main CPU in S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).
The special symbol management process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is "0", the special symbol management process is the process of S74 (FIG. 26) because the second special symbol is the process target when the process of S73 (see FIG. 26) is YES.
(See) is YES, the first special symbol is the processing target. In addition, the control status number is "0".
If not, the special symbol being executed is the processing target of the special symbol management process.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S8).
1).

When it is determined in S81 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S81 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process as a special symbol control process (when it is determined as NO).
(See FIG. 26).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S81 is YE).
(In the case of S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83. The main CP
U201 performs the processing after S83 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S8
The process of 3 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S8
The process of 4 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S85 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S86 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S87 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S88 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After finishing the processing of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 finishes the special symbol management processing, and then finishes the special symbol management processing.
The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main CPU in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).
The special symbol variable display start processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, first, in the main CPU 201, the control state number of the special symbol is ".
It is determined whether or not it is "0" (S91).

When it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S91 is N).
(In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S9).
(1 is a YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 10) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit. do. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include a small hit, but if the pachinko gaming machine includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the hit of the special symbol If the result of the judgment process is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to on. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S93, the process is transferred to S94. The time saving hit flag is turned off at the transition to the C time saving gaming state, and the big hit flag is turned off at the start of the big hit gaming state. If the pachinko gaming machine includes a small hit as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the small hit flag is turned off at the start of the small hit gaming state.

In the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a time saving hit is performed. If it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving hit, it is determined to be a loss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S93) of the special symbol (for example, time saving hit, big hit or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of hits, but there may be one type of big hit and one type of time saving hit. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include the small hit, and a plurality of types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S93) of the special symbol, the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), and the random value for reach determination. or/
And, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value for effect selection and the like. It should be noted that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different depending on the game state and the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S96) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15). After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 27) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. (See S84) will be performed. Main CPU 20
1 transfers the process to S99 after executing the process of S98.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs a game state management process. In this process
Mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S100), transmission reservation process of special symbol effect start command (S101)) in the interrupt-disabled section. It is preferable to do it in-house.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main CPU in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).
The special symbol variable display end processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

When it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S111)
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S).
(When 111 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. The main CPU 201 is S11
After executing the process of 2, the process is transferred to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.
Will be sent to. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201
The special symbol variable display end processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main CPU in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).
The special symbol game determination process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

When it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S121)
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S).
(When 121 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S122, when it is determined that the hit is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S122 is YES), the main CPU 201 is determined.
The process is transferred to S123.

On the other hand, in S122, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is not the stop display mode indicating the jackpot (when the determination in S122 is NO), the main CPU 201
Moves the process to S130.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 186 (both see FIG. 6) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124. The signal output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time reduction flag, and a time reduction counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201, for example, performs a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened (S125), and a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126).
), The process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "3" (S127), the game status specification parameter setting process (S128), and the transmission reservation process of the jackpot start display command (S12).
9) and other processes are performed. The process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "3" (S12).
By performing 7) and switching the control state number, the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed after the end of this special symbol game determination process. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. The main CPU 201 is
When the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is terminated and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 shows the first
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the pachinko machine of.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving management process (S131). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it is possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game.
After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol game end command (
S134) is performed. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S134, the main CP
U201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of loss is derived, the gaming state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S141). The details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. The main CPU 201 is S141
After executing the process of, the process is transferred to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs a counter determination process. The details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. The main CPU 201 is S142
After executing the process of, the time saving management process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 shows the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 inside.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time reduction counter update process (S151). The details of the time reduction counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S151, the process is transferred to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process. The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S152, the counter update process is terminated, and the process is time-saving management process (FIG. 32).
See).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 shows a counter update process (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
3) It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 in (3).

The time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a process when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner when a plurality of time saving game states are overlapped.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is larger than 0 (S161). In this process, YES is determined when both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter is larger than 0 are satisfied, and NO is determined if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to on when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. The probability change flag is set to on when shifting to the high probability gaming state.

The time reduction counter is set in the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, or the C time reduction game state.
Shows the number of times each is executed.

When the transition condition to the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state or / and the C time reduction game state is satisfied, the time reduction counter for the time reduction game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time reduction counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter becomes 0, but this is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which the time reduction counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time reduction game state is terminated when the time reduction counter is set. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time reduction counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time reduction counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the time reduction counter becomes 0 (). The time saving game state may be terminated when the time saving counter is set (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time saving number is reached (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, when it is determined that both the time saving flag on and the time saving counter being larger than 0 are not satisfied (when the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 201 determines.
The time reduction counter update process is terminated, and the process is returned to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving counter is determined to be larger than 0 in S161 (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201
The process is transferred to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0. In this process, when the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. If S163 is YES, the main CPU 20
1 shifts the processing to S164.

The C time saving counter is a counter set when the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state is satisfied during the time saving gaming state. Although not shown in the flowchart, this C time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time reduction counter, which will be described later, is set.

The time saving mode is a flag set when a plurality of time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. In this embodiment, when the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and the C time saving game state is executed overlapping with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 3" is set.
Further, when the B time saving game state is executed overlapping with the time saving game state executed earlier, "time saving mode = 2" is set.

On the other hand, in S163, when it is determined that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being larger than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S163), the main CPU 20
1 shifts the processing to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S164, the process is transferred to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter is larger than 0. In this process, when the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. If S165 is YES, the main CPU 20
1 shifts the processing to S166.

The B time reduction counter is a counter set when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied during the time reduction game state (in the present embodiment, during the C time reduction game state). Although not shown in the flowchart, this B time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time reduction counter is set.

On the other hand, in S165, when it is determined that both the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being larger than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S165), the main CPU 20
1 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time reduction counter. For this process as well, an addition method may be adopted instead of the subtraction method. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S166, the time saving counter update process is terminated, and the process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of the processing of S164 or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of the processing of S166, the main CPU 201 is subjected to the time reduction. Set the mode to off (= 0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, not only the two time-saving gaming states may be overlapped, but also three or more time-saving gaming states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, since the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time-saving game states overlap is the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 shows a counter update process (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
3) It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 in (3).

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variation flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is,
If the probability change flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value.
The ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is predetermined as a value peculiar to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for shifting to the B time saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, the backup clear process is performed, the dedicated operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, and the like. The processing may be performed.

In S171, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (when the determination in S171 is NO), that is, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and performs the counter update process (FIG. FIG. 33).

In S171, when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter.
The main CPU 201 finishes the ceiling counter update process after executing the process of S172, and then ends the process.
The process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 shows a time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 inside.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition determination process (S181). The details of this time saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. The main CPU 201 is S181
After executing the process of, the process is transferred to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition process. The details of this time saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is smaller than 1.

In S183, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is not smaller than 1 (S183 is N).
O determination), that is, when the time reduction counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 performs processing S.
Move to 185.

On the other hand, in S183, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. Main CPU 2
01 transfers the process to S185 after executing the process of S184.

When it is determined in S183 that the time reduction counter is smaller than 1, (S183 is Y).
(In the case of ES determination), the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction counter should both be smaller than 1 (that is, should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some trouble may occur in executing the process by the main CPU 201, for example, when the B time reduction counter or the time reduction counter is 1 or more even though S183 is a YES determination. , An abnormality alarm may be output, or other abnormality processing may be executed. Further, in place of or in addition to this abnormal time processing, when S183 is determined to be YES, not only the time saving flag is turned off (see S184), but also the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter are reset to shorten the time. Consistency between the counter, the B time reduction counter, and the C time reduction counter may be achieved.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S186) of the time saving transition command.
)I do. The time saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination processing and returns the processing to the time saving management processing (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time saving transition judgment processing]
Next, the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time saving game state is performed. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is off (S191).
..

In S191, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S191 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and performs the process as a counter determination process (FIG. FIG. 36). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible not to shift to the B time saving game state.

On the other hand, in S191, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (S191 is YE).
(In the case of S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter has a ceiling value.

When it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in S192, when the ceiling counter is determined to be the ceiling value (YES in S192), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. Main CPU
After executing the process of S195, 201 ends the time saving shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time saving transition processing]
Next, the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 shows a counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is off (S202).
..

In S202, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (when S202 is NO determination), that is, when the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and performs the process as a counter determination process (FIG. 36). See). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, in S202, when it is determined that the probability change flag is off (S202 is YE).
S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

In S203, when it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (when S203 is NO determination), that is, when the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 performs processing in S206.
Move to.

On the other hand, in S203, when it is determined that the ceiling flag is on (S203 is YE).
S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes the B time saving control mode determination process as the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 2, the time reduction performance, and the like are determined. Main CPU
201 transfers the process to S208 after executing the process of S205.

The number of time reductions set in the B time reduction counter is a predetermined number of times. also,
Of the time saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is the hit judgment table of the normal symbol (Fig. 16).
See). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is on.

In S206, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is not on (NO determination in S206), that is, when the time reduction hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition processing and performs the processing as a counter determination processing ( (See FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in S206, when it is determined that the time reduction hit flag is ON (YES determination in S206), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the C time reduction counter, the time reduction mode to be set to 3, and the time reduction performance are determined. Main CPU
201 transfers the processing to S208 after executing the processing of S207.

The number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is determined by the hit type determination table (for example, FIG. 1).
Refer to 3) and determine according to the selected symbol command. Further, among the time saving performances, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Further, among the time saving performances, the opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is shown in the ordinary symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the ordinary symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). As you can see. Further, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. The details of this time reduction setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (S211).
..

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is on (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S212.

The case where S211 is YES is determined when the probability change flag is off and, for example, the B time reduction game state is repeatedly executed while the C time reduction game state is executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value). Case), or when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed (when the "time saving hit" is won) is equivalent. do.

Although not shown, when the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the C time saving game state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and at the same time, sets "time saving mode = 2".
The B time reduction counter determined in S205 is set. Further, when the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first, the main CPU 201 is set to "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time reduction counter determined in S207 is set.

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is not on (NO determination in S211).
That is, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time reduction counter (the number of time reduction remaining in the previously executed time reduction game state) with the new time reduction number (the number of time reductions determined in S205 or S207), and presents the current time. Determines if the time reduction counter is less than the new number of time reductions.

In S212, when it is determined that the current time reduction counter is not smaller than the new time reduction number (when S212 is NO determination), that is, when the current time reduction counter is larger than the new time reduction number, the main CPU 201 is subjected to the time reduction. Finish the setting process and change the process to the time saving transition process (
(See FIG. 38).

On the other hand, in S212, when it is determined that the current time reduction counter is larger than the new time reduction number (YES in S212), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, when the C time-saving game state is executed first and the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time reduction game state is repeatedly executed in the present state, the larger time reduction number of the current time reduction counter value (that is, the time reduction remaining number) and the new time reduction number is reset as a new time reduction counter. .. However, even if the time reduction counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 2
01 does not reset the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction setting process and performs the process of time reduction transition process (FIG. 38).
Return to.

It should be noted that, when the C time-saving game state is executed first and the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game states are repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state. That is, the time saving performance of the previously executed time saving game state can be changed to the time saving performance of the new time saving game state, or the time saving game corresponding to the larger of the current time saving counter and the new time saving number of times. It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

As described above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and is a "normal symbol hit". The winning probability, the variable display time of the normal symbol, or / and the opening pattern (opening number, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 146.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter, it is possible to internally manage that the two time saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner. Then, in the above-mentioned time saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger number of the current time saving counter value and the new time saving number is reset as a new time saving counter. However, even if the two time-saving game states are executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (which the player can grasp) is the above-mentioned two time-saving game states that are executed internally. Of these, only the time-saving performance for any one of the time-saving gaming states. Therefore, without managing the fact that two time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner internally (
(That is, without providing the B time reduction counter and the C time reduction counter), when a plurality of time reduction game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the larger of the current time reduction counter value and the new time reduction number is newly added. It may be reset as a time reduction counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is S
When the judgment is NO, that is, when the game is executed by shifting from the non-time saving game state to the B time saving game state (ceiling counter = ceiling value), or when the non-time saving game state is changed to the C time saving game state. This is the process to be executed (when the "time saving hit" is won). In this process, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) or the C time saving control mode determination process (S2)
The number of time reductions and the time reduction performance determined in 07) are set. The main CPU 201 is S21.
After executing the process of 4, the process is transferred to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag on. Main C
After executing the process of S215, the PU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

As described above, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, when the main CPU 201 finishes the process of shifting to the B time saving gaming state and the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed. I'm going to. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process includes a small hit, the first in the ceiling final change. The result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a small hit. As described above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 is B based on the end of the small hit gaming state.
It is advisable to perform the process of shifting to the time-saving game state.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 20
In No. 1, the process of shifting to the B time saving game state is performed when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, but the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is not limited to this. Based on the above, the transition process to the B time reduction game state may be performed. In particular, in the first pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed in parallel, the B time reduction game is based on the start of variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. It is preferable to perform the transition process to the state. This is because if the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the game shifts to the B time saving game state, and the other special symbol is variable during the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final ceiling variation. This is because when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbol cannot benefit from the B time reduction game state, and the interest may be reduced. In the first pachinko gaming machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long fluctuation such as 600,000 msec. However, in the pachinko gaming machine where the variable display of the special symbol can be performed due to such a long fluctuation, the transition process to the B time shortening gaming state is performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. As a result, even when the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final variation of the ceiling, is performed with a long variation, it is possible to avoid the delay of the start of the B time-shortening gaming state.

Further, in the above-mentioned time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state is shifted to the C time saving gaming state. The process is prioritized over the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the above (see S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the C time reduction control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time reduction gaming state.
B time reduction control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time reduction gaming state.
) May be prioritized.

Further, in the above-mentioned ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter is not updated when the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (S171 in FIG. 35 is NO determination), but this is limited to this. I can't. For example, in the ST machine or the pachinko gaming machine that performs the probability change fall lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed even when the probability change flag is on. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it does not shift to the B time reduction game state, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter reaches the ceiling value, it may shift to the B time reduction game state. .. In this case, the main CPU 201 is "
If only "ceiling counter = ceiling value" is satisfied, the game state is not shifted to the B time reduction game state, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variation counter is the ceiling value, the process is performed to shift to the B time reduction game state.

Further, the ceiling value, which is a condition for shifting to the B time saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), so the ceiling value. Is preferably in the range of 319 × 2.5 to 319 × 3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time reduction specified number of times, which is the end condition of the B time reduction game state, is a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off.
Similarly, regarding the upper limit of the C time reduction specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time reduction game state, up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (Up to 8 times) is preferable. In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), the B time reduction specified number and the C time reduction specified number are both approximately 1212 (319 × 319 ×). It is preferable to set 3.8) as the upper limit.
It is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C time reduction are the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine such as the first pachinko gaming machine, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above. , The time saving hit probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for shifting to the B time saving game state, is set to the jackpot probability (regardless of the set value).
When the denominator of (when the probability change flag is off) is multiplied by a specified number (for example, 3.0),
The ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set value will be detected by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set value, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variation flag is off) by a specified number. It is preferable to set the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modification example related to time saving management processing]
In the above-mentioned time saving management process (hereinafter referred to as “time saving management process of this embodiment”) described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is the special symbol game end process. (See FIG. 31). Further, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is prioritized over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, a transition flag to the B time reduction gaming state (ceiling flag) and a transition flag to the C time reduction gaming state (time reduction hit flag) are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the transition to the B time reduction gaming state is performed. When the time saving hit flag is on, the state is changed to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update processing, the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the transition to the C time saving game state, the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. Whether to separate or share the migration flag is not limited to the above.
Time saving management processing can be performed in various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

Also, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the variable stop time, and after confirming that the "time saving hit" is not won when reaching the ceiling, the game is shifted to the B time saving game state. good.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the fluctuation start time, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the transition flag of the C time saving game state are set. May be provided as a common flag.

Further, when a plurality of time saving game states are not executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter when the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is larger than 0, and 1 in other cases. It is better not to subtract.

[1-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the main CPU in S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).
The large winning opening opening preparation process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

When it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S251)
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S).
(When 251 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is the main RA.
It is stored in a predetermined area in the M203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit (S253 is Y).
(In the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S254. On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when S253 is determined to be NO).
, The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 27) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process. S88) will be performed. The main CPU 201 is S2
After executing the process of 54, the process is transferred to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process.
After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S25).
6). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 131, the number of winning balls at the time of winning the large winning opening 131, and the like are set. .. The number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those whose big prize openings are opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened / closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 131 is performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 259, the process is transferred to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S260) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process ( (See S87 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process.
After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is used in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main CPU in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).
The large winning opening opening control process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

When it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S271)
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S).
(When 271 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) for counting the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 131 is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 131 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S272 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the process.
Move to 274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, various setting processes related to the big prize opening (see S258 in FIG. 40).
It is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in is elapsed.

When it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has not elapsed (
(When S273 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process.
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has elapsed (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs the closing setting process of the large winning opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "3" (S2).
By performing 75) and switching the control state number, the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed again after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process.
After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main CPU in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).
The jackpot end process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S281).
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).
Is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set and various counters (for example, time saving flag, etc.) are set.
For example, a process of setting or resetting the value of a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, a symbol fixed number counter, a round counter, a large winning opening winning counter, etc. is performed. Main CPU 20
1 transfers the process to S283 after executing the process of S282.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-7-3. Ordinary symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 43 are control state numbers of ordinary symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S2).
91).

When it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S291 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and performs the process in S41 (FIG. 2).
3).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (when the determination in S291 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S293 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display start processing of a normal symbol. The process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0".
In this variable display start processing of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 is a normal electric accessory when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the variation pattern determination process of the normal symbol, and the hit determination process of the normal symbol is the normal symbol hit. The opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, waiting time) of 146 is set. If the control status number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CP
U201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display end process of a normal symbol. The process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1".
In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when terminating the variable display of the normal symbol. If the control status number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 is
The process is transferred to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process. This S29
The process of 5 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process of a derivation result of a normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss) is performed. If the control status number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU
201 shifts the processing to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 normally performs an electric accessory opening process. This S29
The process of 6 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is performed in a predetermined manner. If the control status number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 performs the process.
Move to 297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit termination process. This S29
The process of 7 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per-end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control processing.
The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the hit determination table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 16),
Random numbers for hit determination of ordinary symbols are generated, for example, in the range (width) of 0 to 99, and for example, 0 to 79 are used as ordinary symbol hit determination value data (in the case of a non-time saving game state). The probability of hitting a normal symbol is
Since it is determined by the number of normal symbol hit determination value data with respect to the total random number of the normal symbol hit determination random number, for example, the hit probability of the normal symbol is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is different between the case where the time saving control is executed and the case where the time saving control is not executed, but it may be the same or almost the same. Further, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec in the non-time saving game state in which the time saving control is not executed, whereas in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed, for example, 1000
It is executed only for a relatively short time with msec. When the time saving control is executed in this way, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External masquerade interrupt processing]
Next, the external masqueradable interrupt process executed by the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the external masqueradable interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). Main C
After executing the process of S301, the PU 201 shifts the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads out the state of a predetermined input port of the I / O port 205. The above-mentioned predetermined input port has, for example, a set of states such as a power failure detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, and a solenoid monitoring sensor line. The input port to be used. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 performs the process S30.
Move to 3.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure is detected.

When it is determined in S303 that the power failure is not detected (NO in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined in S303 that the power failure is detected (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the process in S30.
Move to 4.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that the power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. Main CP
After executing the process of S304, U201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external masquerade interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 with an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (
S312). When it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, when the power failure is detected) (when the determination in S312 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, when the power failure is not detected) (when the determination in S312 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU
201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I / O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start control flag is a flag for determining which of the power-on recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like is the start state when the power is turned on. For example, in the case of recovery from power failure, it is determined that the game is permitted, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined that the game is not permitted.

The start control flag is composed of a combination of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 on / off information when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, the power is restored, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed.
If the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174 is on, check the setting.
If the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is clear.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (when S315 is NO)
, The main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed in, for example, the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. In addition, S3
The details of the setting control process of 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

When the game is not permitted (NO is determined in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits firing of the game ball from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), a specific switch (for example, setting key 174, backup clear switch 176). Etc.), it is preferable to disable various switches, prohibit payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt prohibition sections in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is the main RAM2.
It is stored in the interrupt counter area in the work area of 03. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to guarantee the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout.
After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S320, the process is transferred to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs a winning information command setting process. In this process, the winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 321, the process is transferred to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs an effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. Main CPU 2
01 transfers the process to S324 after executing the process of S323.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor control process. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) other than the work area (outside the area) in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up and, for example, when the RAM is cleared. Is stored in the area where the data is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S311 and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

When it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S).
(When 331 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332).
The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. Setting change process (S33
After the execution of 2), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S331 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (S).
(When 333 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 performs a setting confirmation process (S334).
The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. Setting confirmation process (S33
After the execution of 4), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S335.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S333 that the value of the start control flag is not the value indicating the setting confirmation, that is, when it is determined that the RAM is clear (when the determination in S333 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation display process. In this process
Currently, the set value is displayed. The main CPU 201 is S335
After executing the process of, the process is transferred to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs an effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25). Is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S336, the process is transferred to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), the WDT clear register address read process and WD
The clearing process of T and the restarting process of WDT are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is appropriately performed. Then, after the processing of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control processing and returns the processing to the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading out the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205.

When it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (when the determination in S341 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (S341 is YE).
(In the case of S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs the update process within the range of the set value. Main C
After executing the process of S342, PU201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. However, in place of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch is provided to operate this setting switch. The set value may be changed by operation.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S343).

When it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S343 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, when it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S343 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when this first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S3).
51). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the above-mentioned setting change process (see FIG. 47).

When it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S351 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S351 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S352).
The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when this second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201
The setting confirmation process is terminated, and the process is returned to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the first normal pre-game processing performed in S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed when the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24) is neither a power failure recovery, a setting change, or a setting confirmation, that is, an initial setting process when the RAM is cleared. ..

The main CPU 201 first performs the initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, the area in the main RAM 203 where the backup data is stored at the time of power failure (hereinafter, ""
Clearing processing (for example, building a work area and setting an address) is performed (referred to as a "backup area"). The area where the data is stored is not cleared by the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data are stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively.
That is, the data backed up at the time of power failure is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main C
PU201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal pre-game process. When this first normal pre-game processing is completed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal pre-game processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation processing (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of recovery from the power failure in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24).

First, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at the time of recovery from power failure (S371). In this process, for example, the data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. The above-mentioned data is various information necessary for advancing the game, such as game state information, on / off state of a hit flag of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and information on the number of pending numbers. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown,
In this process, it is possible to start the game by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S372 after executing the RAM setting processing (S371) at the time of recovery from power failure.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability change flag is on. This process is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S372 that the probability variation flag is not on (when the determination in S372 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S372 that the probability variation flag is on (S372 is YES).
(In the case of determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from the power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, to turn on the probability change notification LED (not shown). This makes it possible to visually grasp whether or not the probability change flag is on when the power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 performs the process S3.
Move to 74.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the power failure return command.
The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S374 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal pre-game process.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes a start opening winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201
The process is transferred to S382. The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S382). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning a prize in the large winning opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random values (random values for hit determination of ordinary symbols, etc.) for ordinary symbols are extracted based on the detection of passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 by the passage gate switch 127. .. In addition, the main RAM 203 holds various random value values (random value for hit determination of normal symbol, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. It has a start storage area (1) to a normal symbol start storage area (4). Then, in the ball passage detection process, it is extracted based on whether or not there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is also determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is, for example, less than four. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start opening winning detection process]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 121 (S391 is N).
(In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 121 (S391 is Y).
(In the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a first special symbol. Various random values such as random values for selecting the effect of the above) are extracted, and the payout information according to the first start opening winning is set. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning of the first starting port 120 is, for example, less than four. Main RAM
The 203 is a first special symbol start storage area (1) to a first special symbol start storage area (1) to hold various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 120 until the start condition is satisfied. (4) is possessed, and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The main RAM 203 is
In addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first special symbol start storage area (0) is also provided, which will be described later.

When the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit is 4 (S393).
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S398.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (when S393 is YES determination).
, The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 2 until the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied.
Perform the process of storing in 03. As a result, the variation display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. This process is a process of determining a variation pattern of the special symbol, performing a hit determination process, or the like using the random number value extracted in S392 prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28). also,
It also determines whether the look-ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the extraction of the random number value in S392 and the execution of the hit determination process of the special symbol, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. In view of performing the look-ahead effect by the sub control circuit 300, it is preferable to perform the pre-reading effect, for example, before and after the processing of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a winning command of the first special symbol. The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information for increasing the reserved number of the first special symbol by one, variation pattern information of the first special symbol (that is, variation pattern command of the special symbol), and the like. The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission processing (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt processing. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 141.

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the second start port switch 141 (S398 is N).
(In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 141 (S398 is Y).
(In the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 uses various random values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a symbol random value of the second special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a second special symbol. Various random values such as random values for selecting the effect of the above) are extracted, and the payout information according to the second start opening winning is set. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning of the second starting port 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 holds various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the starting conditions are satisfied, and the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special It has a symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is a free area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). .. note that,
The main RAM 203 is a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (
In addition to 4), it also has a second special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (S400)
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved 2nd special symbols is less than 4 (when S400 is YES determination)
, The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.
Perform the process of storing in 03. As a result, the variation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a winning command of the second special symbol (S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command including information for increasing the reserved number of the second special symbol by one, information on the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and the like, and is a command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like are performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

The initialization process (S501) described above is a process executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes S502 to S508 described later are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs a read process of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read and performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect mode determination process. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6). The mode of sound production is determined.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including the specified information of the effect content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests for operating various effect devices (for example, a drawing request). , Sound request, lamp request, and character request, etc.). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes the drawing control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6).
The display control circuit 304 is a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
Based on the above, drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 is performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes voice control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a sound request to the voice control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The voice control circuit 305 performs voice control for causing the speaker 32 to output voice based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes the LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).
The accessory control circuit 307 is a message (accessory request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
Based on the above, drive control for operating the effect drive motor (not shown) related to all or part of the effect accessory group 58 constituting the effect accessory group 58 is performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 3
01 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of the effect mode determination process by the sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub CPU 301) performs the effect mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

As one of the various processes performed in the effect mode determination process, the sub CPU 301 is, for example, an effect pattern (hereinafter, "sub-variation") of the sub-variation effect corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "the variation"). A sub-variable effect pattern determination process for determining (referred to as an effect pattern), a look-ahead effect pattern determination process for determining an effect pattern for a look-ahead effect (hereinafter referred to as a “look-ahead effect pattern”), and the like are performed. Further, in the effect mode determination process, for example, the effect mode of the countdown effect suggesting that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value and the effect mode of the B time saving game state transition effect suggesting that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value are determined. The process of determining various production modes related to the progress of the game, such as the process, is also performed.

The sub-variation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. The sub-variation effect pattern is an effect pattern (for example, a variation pattern or a character of a decorative symbol) performed by the sub CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 along with the variable display of the special symbol as an effect indicating the expected degree of the result of the variation. Production patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation effect, the expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol with the passage of time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol according to the sub-variation effect pattern to be executed. It is possible to show that the degree is maintained or increased.

Sub-variable effect patterns include, for example, time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, big hit system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 described later. Is included. As described above, the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C is the hit determination process of the special symbol (FIG. 2).
The result of (see S93 of 8) is a reach effect indicating that there is a possibility of a time saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). The jackpot system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit or a big hit.

In addition, for example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect suggesting the transition timing to the B time saving game state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 may be set to the sub CPU 301.
It is advisable to give priority to one of the effects.

The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a variation pattern of a special symbol determined as a result of the look-ahead determination process. The look-ahead effect is an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process, and is start information such as various random value values extracted based on the winning when the first starting port 120 is in a pending state (that is, after winning a prize in the first starting port 120). Is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 until is subjected to the hit determination process of the special symbol (until the variable display of the special symbol is started).

In the look-ahead effect, according to the look-ahead effect pattern to be executed, the look-ahead determination is made with the passage of time (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the start information held in advance) while in the hold state. It is possible to show that expectations for the outcome of the treatment are maintained or increased.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a reserved image displayed on the display device 7. The hold image is an image showing the current hold status.

The look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead hit type effect pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result type (whether it is a time saving hit or a big hit) of the look-ahead judgment process, that is, the hit judgment process of the special symbol, and the special symbol. It includes a look-ahead expected value effect pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result of the hit determination process to be a hit (big hit or time saving hit). That is, in the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest an expected value for the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol and / or an expected value for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be a hit. Is. Further, in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and
The look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59, which will be described later) is performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation effect pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub-variation effect pattern determination table (detailed description is omitted) in a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the time reduction flag is off. This sub-variation effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation effect pattern determination table in a gaming state (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state) in which the time-saving flag is on, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of FIG. 54, and displays it as a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 200. A sub-variation effect pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-variation effect pattern includes the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, the big hit system reach A, B, C, and the common reach A, B, C, D, E. There is.

The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving hit as described above, and are reach effects that can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of time-saving hit. The time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (FIG. 15). reference). The time-saving hit system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead target, but may be a sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead mode. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. However, while the time-saving hit system reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, the time-saving hit system reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (in the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15).
See FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 below).

The jackpot-type reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of a jackpot as described above, and are reach effects that can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot. The jackpot reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss or a "time saving hit", and is displayed only when the result is a "big hit" (FIG. 1).
5). This jackpot system reach A is not limited to the sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead target, but is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation effect pattern of the look-ahead mode. The jackpot reach B and the jackpot reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. However, while the jackpot reach B is not a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern, the jackpot reach C is a look-ahead target sub-variation effect pattern (see the “look-ahead flag” column in FIG. 15).

The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit or a short time hit as described above, and in terms of appearance, it is possible to make a big hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode in which it is difficult to grasp whether or not there is a sex. The common reach A is a hit (big hit, time saving hit) fixed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is lost, and is displayed only when it is a big hit or a "time saving hit". (Fig. 15)
reference). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance mode. Further, the common reach D is a production that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C.
Further, the common reach E is a production that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. The common reach A and the common reach B are not the sub-variable effect patterns to be read ahead, while the common reach C, the common reach D, and the common reach E are the sub-variable effect patterns to be read ahead (“look-ahead” in FIG. 15). See the "Flags" column).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 uses the sub variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54).
Refer to, and the sub-variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls so that the determined sub-variation effect pattern is displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead effect pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process, which are performed as the look-ahead effect pattern determination process, will be described.

The work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) has a first special symbol start storage area (0), a first special symbol start storage area (1), and a first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. , The first sub-holding area (0), the first sub-holding area (1), and the first sub-holding area (1), as the areas corresponding to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and the first special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. A sub-holding area (2), a first sub-holding area (3), and a first sub-holding area (4) are provided. In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4), various extracted random value values are used. Hold information is stored. Further, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-holding area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command of the first starting opening winning, the sub CPU 301 stores the received information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

Further, the work RAM 303 has a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. The second sub-holding area (0), the second sub-holding area (1), and the second sub-holding area (2nd sub-holding area (1)) correspond to the start storage area (3) and the second special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. 2), a second sub-holding area (3), and a second sub-holding area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the pre-reading effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal gaming state, but the pre-reading effect is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this, and in other gaming states (for example, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state). It may be done, or it may be done about the second special symbol.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a reserved image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. In the display area of the display device 7, the first sub-holding area (0) is used as an area for displaying the hold image.
Corresponds to the 0th area corresponding to, the 1st reserved area corresponding to the 1st sub-reserved area (1), the 2nd reserved area corresponding to the 1st sub-reserved area (2), and the 1st sub-reserved area (3). A third reserved area and a fourth reserved area corresponding to the first sub-reserved area (4) are provided.

[1-9-2-1. Table referred to in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination process]
The table referred to in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination process will be described.

By the way, the form of the hold image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes a time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit and a possibility of a big hit. The big hit system look-ahead effect form shown and the common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both the time saving hit and the big hit are included.

The look-ahead type effect pattern changes the form of the reserved image from, for example, the common hit type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form, or changes from the common hit type look-ahead effect form to the big hit type look-ahead effect form. This is an effect pattern capable of suggesting a change in the expected value with respect to the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

FIG. 55 is an example of a look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table.
In FIG. 55, among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 54, only the fluctuation pattern to be read ahead is shown. Further, FIG. 56 is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table.
These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. 55, when the sub CPU 301 receives the variation pattern in which the look-ahead flag is set, the sub C
The PU 301 determines the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number based on, for example, the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations. The number of holds here includes start information to be read ahead. That is, when the start information extracted based on the winning of the first start port 120 is held, the number of holds after the hold corresponds to the number of holds shown in FIG. 55.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Also, for example, the fluctuation pattern is "0E".
When it is "H" and the number of reservations is "2", the look-ahead hit type production pattern determination table number is "H".
22 "is decided.

When the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 determines.
With reference to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined. More specifically, as shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56, for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is based on the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random number value 1. It is determined.

In FIG. 56, for convenience, the “look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number” is changed to “S”.
It is indicated as "ASPT number", and "pre-reading hit type effect pattern" is indicated as "SAS effect pattern". The sub-effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-effect selection random value 1 is "55", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "07H". Further, for example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-effect selection random value 1 is "77", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is "16".
It is decided to be "H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 56 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "A" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is ,
It is shown that the reserved image is displayed in the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit. When the reserved image is displayed in the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode, it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of time-saving hit in appearance.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "B" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is ,
It is shown that the reserved image is displayed in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode, it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of a jackpot in appearance.

Further, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. 56, "C" shown corresponding to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number and the sub-effect selection random value 1 is ,
It is shown that the reserved image is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect mode, which indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit or a big hit. When the reserved image is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect mode, it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility of a time saving hit or a big hit in appearance.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form "C" is displayed in the third hold area, and the second after shift from the third hold area is displayed.
The common hit system look-ahead effect mode "C" is also displayed in the hold area. Then, when shifting from the second holding area to the first holding area, the common hit system look-ahead effect form "C" changes to the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form "A", and in the first hold area, the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form is changed. "A" is displayed.

Further, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form "C" is displayed in the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, the common hit system look-ahead effect form "C" is changed to the big hit system look-ahead effect form "C".
In the first holding area after the change to "B", the second holding area, and the first holding area after being shifted from the second holding area, the jackpot system look-ahead effect mode "B" is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes the following a) to
E) pattern is included. In this embodiment, the pattern that changes from the big hit system look-ahead effect form “B” to the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form “A” and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form “A”.
The pattern that changes from "A" to the large / short hit look-ahead effect form "B" is not included in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, but these patterns may be included in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern.
B) The look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern) in which the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of being held and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. "09H").
B) The pre-reading jackpot effect pattern (for example, the pre-reading hit type effect pattern "17H"" in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of being held and the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. ).
C) A look-ahead common hit effect pattern A (for example, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern "24H") in which the common hit-type look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of holding, and then changes to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form.
D) A look-ahead common hit effect pattern B (for example, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern "12H") that is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect form at the time of being held and then changes to the big hit system look-ahead effect form.
E) When it is put on hold, it is displayed in the common hit system look-ahead effect form, and after that, the common hit system look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form. Look-ahead common hit effect pattern C (
For example, look-ahead hit type production pattern "06H").

As described above, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55), and based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations, the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number). ) Is determined. And sub C
The PU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and is based on the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the sub-effect selection random number value 1, and is the look-ahead hit type. The effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, at the time of holding, the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode “A” is displayed.
After that, the look-ahead type look-ahead effect pattern that changes to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form "B" is not shown, but in this way, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form "A" changes to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect form "B". The look-ahead hit type effect pattern to be performed may be determined by the sub CPU 301. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

Further, in FIG. 56, in the jackpot-based look-ahead effect mode “B”, as described above, the jackpot-based look-ahead effect indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (that is, it may be lost). Although it is a form, in addition to this, a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the look-ahead type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the look-ahead type effect patterns in (f) to (h) below.
F) A look-ahead jackpot confirmed effect pattern A in which the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of being held, and the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter.
G) At the time of being put on hold, another look-ahead effect form (for example, a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form "A"
, The jackpot-based look-ahead effect form "B", the common hit-based look-ahead effect form "C", etc.) is displayed, and then the look-ahead jackpot confirmed effect pattern B changes to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form.
H) At the time of being put on hold, another look-ahead effect form (for example, a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form "A"
, Common hit system look-ahead effect form "C" etc.) is displayed, and then the big hit system look-ahead effect form "C" is displayed.
"B" is displayed, and after that, the look-ahead jackpot confirmation effect pattern C that changes to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead effect form.

Further, in FIG. 56, the big hit system look-ahead effect form “B” with the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form “A”.
"And the common hit system look-ahead effect form" C ", the display frequency of the common hit system look-ahead effect form" C "is the highest at the time of being reserved, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of holding, the display frequency of the time-saving pre-reading effect mode "A" may be the highest, or at the time of holding, the display frequency of the jackpot-based pre-reading effect "B" is the highest. You may do so. Further, the display frequency of the common hit system look-ahead effect mode "C" may be set to be the lowest at the time of holding.

Further, in FIG. 56, all the “look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASP”)
The sub-effect selection random value 1 of a predetermined width is assigned to "T number)", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-effect selection random value is not assigned only to a specific SASPT number (that is, a specific). It may not be selected by setting the distribution rate of the SASPT number to 0).

[1-9-2-2. Table referenced in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process]
Next, the table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit), which is referred to when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “time saving hit” or “big hit”. also,
FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss), which is referred to when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost.

By the way, the form of the reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs depending on the expected value for the hit (time saving hit, big hit).

When a hold image is displayed as a time-saving look-ahead effect mode, for example, changing the shape of the hold image, which is usually represented by a triangle, such as "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star". Can represent the change in expected value. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is a rectangle, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a star.

When the hold image is displayed as a jackpot look-ahead effect mode, for example, the hold image normally represented by white is changed in color such as "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow". Can represent the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the reserved image is blue, and the expected value is the highest when the reserved image is a rainbow.

Although the details will be described later, when the hold image is displayed as a common hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit, the hold image is used, for example, the expected value for the big hit. It may be represented by both a color indicating a level and a shape indicating an expected value level for a time saving hit, or it may be represented by a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form.

The hold image on which the look-ahead effect is performed can change from an effect form in which the expected value is relatively low to an effect form in which the expected value is relatively high, but the expected value is relative from the effect form in which the expected value is relatively high. It is preferable that it does not change to a low production form. In addition, when changing the production form of the reserved image, it is not always necessary to change one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star" or "blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow". For example, it may be changed to "pentagon->circle" or "yellow->rainbow". Further, the form of the reserved image does not necessarily have to start from the quadrangle or blue having the lowest expected value, and may start from, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 57 are the same as those of FIG. 56.
The first reserved area to the fourth reserved area are shown, respectively.

Further, in each of the columns "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 57, "pre-reading hit type effect pattern determination table number" and the sub-effect selection random value 2 are shown. 0
"5" indicates the high expected value for a hit (time saving hit, big hit). for example,
The above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", and the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1".
, The above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2", the above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", and the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "3". It corresponds to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5".

Hereinafter, in each of the columns "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) column of FIG. 57, "pre-reading hit type effect pattern determination table number" and the sub-effect selection random value 2 are shown. 0
"5" are referred to as expected value levels "0" to "5".

The look-ahead expected value effect pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is “time saving hit” or “big hit” is, for example, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (hit time) in FIG. It is determined based on the number of holdings and the random value 2 for sub-effect selection. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is
As shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. 58, it is determined based on, for example, the number of holds and the sub-effect selection random number value 2. Random value 2 for sub-effect selection
Is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, for example, when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received. Note that, in FIGS. 57 and 58, only the case where the number of holds is “1” to “3” is shown, and the case where the number of holds is “4” is shown for convenience.
It is omitted.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the number of holdings is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "43H". .. When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area. To "3", and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the number of holdings is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". Will be done. When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third hold area, the expected value level is "2" in the second hold area, and the first hold from the second hold area. The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting to the region.

As described above, the sub CPU 301 has a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) (see FIG. 57) or a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (at the time of loss) based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Refer to), the number of holds and the random value for sub-effect selection 2
Based on the above, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value effect pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57 and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the selection rate of the look-ahead expected value effect pattern (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) whose expected value level is relatively low is increased. However, the bias is not limited to this, and it can be changed as appropriate, for example, evenly distributed.

Further, in FIGS. 57 and 58, the random value 2 for sub-effect selection having a predetermined width is assigned to all the “look-ahead expected value effect patterns”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific “look-ahead expected value effect pattern” is assigned. The sub-effect selection random value 2 may not be assigned only to "" (that is, the distribution rate of the specific "look-ahead expected value effect pattern" may be set to 0 and not selected).

[1-9-3. Look-ahead effect pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 shows the sub CPU 3
This is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by 01.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which the left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 has been received (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 30
1 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (when the determination in S3001 is YES),
The sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the look-ahead target is currently on hold.
That is, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed for the current hold. When there are a plurality of holds, the look-ahead effect may be performed on a plurality of hold images, but in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect may be performed.
The look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image.

When the look-ahead effect is executed for the current hold (when S3002 is NO determination)
, The sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect is not executed for the current hold (when the determination in S3002 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target (see FIG. 55).

When the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is not the read-ahead target (S3003 is N)
(In the case of O determination), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is the read-ahead target (S300).
3), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than, for example, the upper limit number that can be held (for example, 4 or 8). This process is for avoiding the transition to the B time saving game state before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the hold for which the look-ahead effect is performed, even though the look-ahead effect is performed. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the maximum number that can be held, but the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not limited to this. When it is a look-ahead target (when S3003 is a YES judgment),
It may be determined whether or not it is larger than the number of holds including the look-ahead target. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table number is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) is referred to.
The look-ahead hit type production pattern is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit". In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if this result is a "time saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. Will be done. However, it is not limited to this, and the winning information of the special symbol is sent from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU.
By transmitting to 301, "time saving hit" or "big hit" may be determined.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (S300)
7 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 301 shifts the processing to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (S3007 is NO determination), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (hit time) determination process. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table of FIG. 57 (at the time of hit)
Refer to, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of hit). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead effect pattern determination process at the time of loss. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table of FIG. 58 (at the time of loss)
Refer to, and determine the look-ahead expected value production pattern (at the time of loss). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Action effect by performing look-ahead effect, extended example of look-ahead effect]
In the pre-reading effect described above, not only is it interesting to see whether the pre-reading effect form of the big hit system or the pre-reading effect form of the time-saving hit system is changed due to the change in the form of the reserved image, but also the hit (
It is possible to change the expected value level (big hit, short-time hit), and it is possible to enhance the interest by performing a new production that has never been seen before. The timing for changing the form of the hold image is not limited to the time when the hold shifts, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, the form of the reserved image performed as the look-ahead effect (for example, the first sub-reserved area (4) to
Regarding the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (1)), the first starting port 1
It may be determined at the time of winning the prize 20 and the form of the reserved image in the variable display of the special symbol of the variation may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, a variation pattern in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead time reduction hit effect pattern (FIG. 5).
4 is determined by the probability determined by, for example, "03H" and "0EH") and the fluctuation pattern in which the look-ahead effect is executed by the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54). Compared to the probability of being done, the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15).
.. That is, as for the execution rate of the look-ahead effect, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead time-shortening effect pattern is higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. Therefore, compared to the conventional pachinko gaming machine in which the look-ahead effect is performed only when there is a possibility of a big hit, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of the hit.
It will be possible to enhance the interest.

The execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead time-shortening effect pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big hit is higher than the expected value for the short-time hit, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the probability change flag is off (in the present embodiment, the normal gaming state and the low probability time saving gaming state), the "time saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (FIG. 10). reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", when the C-time-saving game state is executed in combination with the A-time-saving game state, and for the A-time-saving game state. It is unlikely that the number of time reductions will increase in any case where the C time reduction game states are not executed repeatedly. Therefore, by making it as little as possible for the player to know that there is a possibility of winning the "time saving hit" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving hit" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-short game state, and the look-ahead effect is performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-short game state and the high-accuracy low-time-short game state. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect may be performed for the second special symbol as well.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-variation effect pattern, a time-saving hit system reach, a big hit system reach, or a common reach can be executed. In this embodiment, FIGS. 15 and 54
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 56, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the look-ahead time-saving effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern, and does not execute the big hit system reach. Further, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern, and does not execute the time saving hit system reach.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the look-ahead time-saving effect pattern or the look-ahead common hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 can execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. However, when the pre-reading effect is executed by the pre-reading jackpot effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-variable effect pattern.

Further, a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) “37H” shown in FIG. 56) and a look-ahead time-short hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “29H” shown in FIG. 56). ") And the look-ahead common hit effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern (SAS effect pattern)" 27H "shown in FIG. 56).
Regardless of which of the above is executed, the sub CPU 301 has a common reach as the sub-variation effect pattern (for example, the sub-variation effect patterns “0AH” and “0BH” shown in FIG. 55.
") May be executed.

Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the time-saving hit system reach is executed, the loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving hit system reach, and then the big hit system reach is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end whether or not the jackpot reach with a high profit margin is executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E is executed in the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "target fluctuation") performed for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, the common reach C and the common reach C are executed. After the common effect is displayed, it is possible to shift to the effect common to the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to Common Reach C is executed,
Does not shift to jackpot reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the effect common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the effect common to the time-saving hit system reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, the process does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when the look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as “big hit look-ahead effect”) indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a big hit has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 is new. Do not execute look-ahead effect. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed on a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to execute a new look-ahead effect when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed.

For example, any one hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") in which the variable display of the special symbol is started after this first hold. ), And when the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “17H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, the look-ahead effect is performed in the second hold. Even if it is executed, the look-ahead effect in this second hold may be meaningless. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is controlled to the A time saving gaming state after the end of this jackpot gaming state, for example, "time saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefits of this "time saving hit", and in this case, the interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold that is digested after the hold on which the jackpot look-ahead effect is executed.

Even if the first hold is a big hit hold (a hold from which a big hit is derived), the first hold
When the look-ahead effect is not executed for the hold of, the look-ahead effect may or may not be executed in the second hold.

Further, even when the big hit look-ahead effect of Gase (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “53H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, when the time saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “05H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first hold, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. You may. This is because even if a time-saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but in the pachinko gaming machine including the small hit in the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the small hit is small in the first hold. Even when the hit look-ahead effect is executed, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a big hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, the look-ahead effect mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a small hit (hereinafter, "small hit look-ahead effect").
When is executed in the first hold), the jackpot look-ahead effect or the time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to expect a small hit with a higher degree of profit for the player.

Further, as a sub-variation effect pattern, for example, the first starting port 120 during execution of the jackpot system reach
When the start information is put on hold by winning a prize, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect on this hold.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by the main CPU 201 is reserved (this). This hold is referred to as "specific hold" in the paragraph), and the sub CPU 301 is after the end of the jackpot gaming state regardless of whether the look-ahead effect is executed or the look-ahead effect is not executed for this specific hold. , The look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold unless it is in the normal gaming state. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even if it is in the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko gaming machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state), it is specified when the jackpot display mode is derived. If there is a hold, the sub CPU
The 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold after the end of the big hit game state.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the main CP
When the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by U201 is reserved (this holding is referred to as "specific holding" in this paragraph), this specific holding is even "time saving hit". The main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time saving game state based on the "time saving hit" after the end of the big hit gaming state. For example, if the specification does not execute a plurality of time-saving game states in an overlapping manner when the time-saving game states overlap, and the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit". Even if it is on hold, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time saving game state based on the "time saving hit".

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Hereinafter, specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute the look-ahead effect using the reserved image based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead hit type effect pattern and a look-ahead expected value effect pattern. Here, first, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading jackpot effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

60 (a) to 60 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the big hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a big hit changes. It is a figure which shows the process. The look-ahead hit type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f) corresponds to “1CH”, “3CH”, “58H”, or “78H” in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f) is not shown in FIG. 57.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (f), the display area 7a of the display device 7 is the first.
The reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are displayed. As described above, the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 are areas indicating whether or not the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4), respectively. be. Further, the 0th region 410 is
This is the area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0) in which the information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored.

In this embodiment, when the hold information is stored in the first sub hold area, the sub CPU 301
Reserves the reserved areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub-reserved area in which the reserved information is stored.
It is displayed as a hold image indicated by a triangle (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "hold image"). Further, when the hold information is not stored in the first sub hold area, the sub CPU 301 uses the sub CPU 301.
The reserved image is not displayed, and only the frame of the reserved area is displayed.

In FIG. 60A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (1) to (3), and the reserved information is not stored in the first sub-reserved area (4).

In FIG. 60 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a). This indicates that the reserved information is newly stored in the first sub-reserved area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 so as to be different depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color except for the rainbow.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60B, the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level “0”), and is shown in the fourth reserved area 414. The color of the reserved image is blue (expected value level "1").

FIG. 60 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 60 (b) is , Is an image showing that the color has changed from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reserved area 413.

FIG. 60 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 60 (c) is , Is an image showing a change from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reserved region 412.

FIG. 60 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 60 (d) is , Is an image showing a change from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reserved area 411.

FIG. 60 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60 (e), and the color of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 60 (e) is , Is an image showing that the color changed from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th region 410.

Further, the color (expected value level) of the hold image indicating the expected value for the jackpot does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. ..

Further, in FIG. 60, the jackpot system look-ahead effect mode is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the jackpot is derived. The look-ahead effect that changes to the effect form may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-2. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead time saving effect pattern]
Next, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading time-shortening effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit is provided. It is a figure which shows the changing process. The look-ahead time-saving hit type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) is “0EH”, “2EH”, “4AH”, or “6A” in FIG. 56.
Corresponds to "H". Further, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (f) is not shown in FIG. 57.

In FIG. 61A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413, and the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 has the first reserved area 411 to
The form (for example, shape) of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is displayed differently according to the expected value for the time saving hit.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big hit is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for the time saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61B, the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle (expected value level “0”), which is shown in the fourth reserved area 414. The shape of the reserved image is a quadrangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. 61 (b) is , Third
It is an image which shows that it changed from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when it was shifted to the hold area 413.

FIG. 61 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 61 (c) is , Second
It is an image which shows that it changed from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when it was shifted to the holding area 412.

FIG. 61 (e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 61 (d) is , 1st
It is an image which shows that it changed from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when it was shifted to the holding area 411.

FIG. 61 (f) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61 (e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. 61 (e) is , 0th
It is an image which shows that it changed from a circle to a star (expected value level "5") when it was shifted to the region 410.

The shape of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of "quadrangle <pentagon <hexagon <circle <star", for example, it changes to "pentagon → circle". You may let me.

In addition, the shape (expected value level) of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit is not always the same.
It does not need to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, in FIG. 61, the time-saving hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived. It may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a large-value confirmed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big-hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when the look-ahead effect is performed with the look-ahead common hit effect pattern]
Next, as the pre-reading hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which the pre-reading effect is performed by the pre-reading common hit effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

62 (a) to 62 (d) are examples of pre-reading effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which the hold image changes from the system look-ahead effect form to the jackpot system look-ahead effect form. The change in the common hit system look-ahead effect form is that the expected value level of the hit (time saving hit, big hit) changes, and that the type of hit changes to a big hit or a time saving hit. Is included. The look-ahead type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (d) corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 62 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 62 (d) corresponds to "43H" in FIG. 57.

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit are both as a common hit system look-ahead effect mode showing that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit. Is displayed.

In FIG. 62A, a normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412, and the third reserved area 413 and the fourth reserved area 414 display the normal reserved image. The hold image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62 (a). The sub CPU 301 has a first reserved area 411 to a fourth reserved area 41.
The form (for example, color and shape) of the reserved image shown in 4 is hit (big hit or time saving hit).
It is displayed differently according to the expected value for. In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or the expected value for the hit is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle.
The expected value for short hits increases in the order of "blue quadrangle <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow star".

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62B, the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412
The form of the reserved image shown in is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2"). ..

FIG. 62 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62 (b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 62 (b) is , Second
Yellow pentagon to green hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to hold area 412
It is an image showing that it has changed to.

62 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 62 (c) is , 1st
When shifted to the hold area 411, it changed from a green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form with expected value level "3") to a rainbow triangle (big hit system look-ahead effect form with expected value level "5"). It is an image showing that.

That is, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (c), it is determined whether the form of the reserved image is a form showing an expected value for a big hit or a form showing an expected value for a time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, FIG. 62 (d)
), It is possible to grasp that the form of the reserved image indicates the expected value for the jackpot, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level “5”). It is something like that.

As described above, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.
One of a look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern showing the expected value for the time-saving hit, a look-ahead big hit effect pattern showing the expected value for the big hit, and a look-ahead common hit effect pattern showing the expected value for the hit (big hit or time-saving hit). It is configured so that the look-ahead effect can be executed by the pattern. Then, when the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead common hit effect pattern, the player is given an interest in whether the reserved image changes to the big hit type look-ahead effect form or the time-saving hit type look-ahead effect form. It is possible to enhance the interest.

It is necessary to change the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for the time saving hit one by one in the order of "blue quadrangle <yellow pentagon <green hexagon <red circle <rainbow star". Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form) → red triangle (big hit system look-ahead effect form)" or "green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead effect form) → It may be changed to a "triangular star (time saving hit system look-ahead effect form)". Also, it is not always necessary to start the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for the hit from the blue rectangle with the lowest expected value.
For example, it may start from a red circle.

Further, the form of the hold image showing the expected value for the hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Further, in FIG. 62, the common hit system look-ahead effect mode is changed to change the expected value from which one of the hits (big hit or time saving hit) is derived, or the expected hit is changed from an unknown state to a big hit. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, the look-ahead effect shown below may be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before the change to the jackpot fixed look-ahead effect form.
-A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
・ The common hit type look-ahead effect form changed to the big hit type look-ahead effect form, and then
A look-ahead effect that changes to a large-scale confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-4. Modification example of common hit system look-ahead production form]
In addition, as the form of the reserved image, the common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility of both the big hit and the time saving hit is not necessarily the color showing the expected value for the big hit.
It is not limited to the form represented by both the shape showing the expected value for the time saving hit. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect mode may be provided. When a dedicated common hit system look-ahead production form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both big hits and time-saving hits, and since the expected values for each are unknown, future changes in the production mode will occur. You will be able to play games with a sense of expectation, and you will be able to improve your interest.

63 (a) to 63 (d) are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the reserved image is changed from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect mode to the jackpot-type look-ahead effect mode. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. The look-ahead type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) corresponds to “15H”, “35H”, “51H”, or “71H” in FIG. 56, and corresponds to FIG. 63 (a). )-The look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIG. 63 (d) corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

Further, FIGS. 64A to 64D are examples of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect mode to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect mode. It is a figure which shows the process of changing a hold image. The look-ahead hit type effect patterns shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (d) are “07H”, “27H”, and “43H” in FIG. 56.
, Or "63H", and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (d) corresponds to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58.

In FIGS. 63 (a) and 64 (a), the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 are shown.
A normal reserved image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed in the third reserved area 41.
The reserved image is not displayed in the 3rd and 4th reserved areas 414, and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64 (b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64 (a).

In both of FIGS. 63 (b) and 64 (b), the form of the hold image shown in the third hold area 413 is a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form, for example, a brilliant form. The expected value level can be changed by changing the degree of brightness of the light.

FIG. 63 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), and is a dedicated common hit system displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 63 (b). It is an image which shows that the look-ahead effect form is shifted to the 2nd hold area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 64 (c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and is a dedicated image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. 64 (b). It is an image which shows that the common hit system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the 2nd hold area 412 as it is.

FIG. 63 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 63 (c) is , 1st
When shifting to the hold area 411, the red triangle (from the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form)
It is an image which shows that it changed to the expected value level "4") of a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 64 (d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64 (c), and is a hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. 64 (c). It is an image showing that when the form is shifted to the first reserved area 411, it changes from the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form to a white circle (expected value level “4” per time reduction).

In this way, even when the look-ahead effect form is represented by the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form, the big hit-type look-ahead effect form and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form can be changed from the dedicated common hit-type look-ahead effect form to the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is possible to give the player the fun of which way it will change, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

[1-11. Signal output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer provided on each island (not shown)). The signal will be described. In this embodiment, the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described, but the signal from the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine may be input.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, "Prize Ball Information 1" and "Prize Ball Information 1".
Various signals of "door / frame opening", "external information 1" to "external information 8", "prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these signals may be output. It may be configured so that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output from CN1 and CH2.
The signal of "door / frame open" is output from, and "external information 1" is output from CH3 to CH10, respectively.
Each signal of "external information 8" is output, the signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and the signal of "security" is output from CH12. The output conditions for the signal from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 65.

Next, an example of the timing chart of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine,
The signal of "Prize Ball Information 1" will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec for every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of “Prize ball information 1” among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, the large winning opening 131 (FIG. 4).
When a game ball wins in (see), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball wins in a starting port (first starting port 120 or second starting port 140 (both see FIG. 4)). For example, three prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine for, for example, 120 msec, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 is, for example, 120 ms at the timing when the payout detection switch of the tenth prize ball is turned on from the time of the previous output of the signal of "prize ball information 1".
During ec, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output. It should be noted that outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is only an example, for example, the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is used. It may be between the time it is turned on and the time it is turned off. In addition, the signal of "Prize Ball Information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, or 120.
Outputting for msec is only an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be appropriately set.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be described. The "security" signal is mainly a signal output when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an outline of an error in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200 and the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6). "Security signal" signal (shown as "security signal" in FIG. 67)
It is a table showing the output time and remarks of.

The first pachinko gaming machine does not have a large winning slot for small hits, but FIG. 67 shows for convenience.
It also describes the abnormal winning error of the large winning opening for small hits. Further, in FIG. 67, the big winning opening 131 is described as a big winning opening for big hits.

The outline of the error shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only a part of them may be determined to be an error. For example, an error not shown in FIG. 67 is determined to be an error. You may do so. Those not shown in FIG. 67 but judged to be an error include
For example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is turned on or off for a predetermined time or longer, and is not discharged inside the big winning opening (big winning big winning opening or small hit big winning opening). If there is a game ball in the game or if there is a prize in the big prize opening when the big winning opening is not opened, an error in the entry / exit of the big winning opening, an error in the vibration sensor when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time, etc. correspond. Further, for example, when a specific area is provided in the jackpot game control and the probability variation control is executed after the jackpot game control is completed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control. In the case of abnormal passage to a specific area, or when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball inside the jackpot for big hits, it is judged as an error. It is preferable to configure it.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the sub CPU 30
A fraud detection related command is sent to 1 (see FIG. 6). Sub CPU that received fraud detection related
301 executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The following is an example of the case where an abnormal winning error occurs in the big winning opening for big hits, and the main CPU
The control by the 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both see FIG. 6) will be briefly described.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, if there is one winning detection after the initial power is turned on and before the first big hit big winning opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) will have the big hit big winning. Winning opening abnormality It is determined that a winning error has occurred, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the big winning opening for big hits is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, since the output time of the “security” signal is 12 seconds regardless of any error, the device outside the machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6)). (See) and the island computer (not shown) can grasp the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the content of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the machine that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. May be good.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives, for example, a command related to fraud detection indicating a jackpot abnormal winning error for a jackpot, the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) executes all or part of the following notification control, for example.
For example, 30 seconds after receiving the fraud detection related command, the notification control shown below is terminated.
-Notification control for displaying, for example, the characters "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, the voice of "Abnormal winning error at the large winning opening" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control in which the LED group 46 (both, for example, see FIG. 6) is fully lit in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

If, for example, there is a power failure before 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives the fraud detection-related command indicating the jackpot abnormal winning error during the execution of the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of the jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-mentioned Re-execute the notification control.

Next, regarding the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state, FIG. 6
This will be described with reference to 8. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the machine according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 68, the signal to be output is indicated by ◯, and the signal not to be output is indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the output signal is different depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, no signal is output during the normal gaming state (other than big hit / small hit, probable change / short time), and during the low probable time / short game state (other than big hit / small hit), "external information 3". And "External Information 7" are output, and the signals of "External Information 3", "External Information 5" and "External Information 7" are output during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). Output. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). Will be done.

In this way, by making the output signal different according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device (for example, a hall computer 1) capable of receiving the signal.
The 86 (see FIG. 6) and the island computer (not shown) can grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability change / time reduction). apart from)
It is the same as the signal output to. Similarly, during the small hit game control process (during the low accuracy time-saving game state)
The signal output to is the same as the signal output during the low-accuracy time-short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit), and is output during the small-hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-short game state). The signal is
It is the same as the signal output during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit), and the signal output during the small-hit game control process (during the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) is highly accurate. It is the same as the signal output during the non-time saving game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). That is, in the device outside the machine capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)), the small hit game control process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine of the external information transmission source. It is not possible to know whether or not it is. However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small hit game control process different from the signal output when the small hit game control process is not in progress, the pachinko gaming machine of the external information transmission source has a small hit. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by the device outside the machine that can receive the signal.

Further, during the low-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and during the small hit game control process (low accuracy) shown in FIG. 68. During the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state), the signals are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be assumed that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special figure shortening control are executed, or only the electric support control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control. If this is the case, the time saving control may be being executed, or if only the special figure shortening control is being executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control, the time saving control may be being executed.

Further, in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine described above, the control of the main CPU is used.
It is possible to control the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state (the function of the A time saving game state, the function of the B time saving game state, and the function of the C time saving game state are installed). I explained it as a premise, but it is not limited to this. For example, only one of the functions of the A time-saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state (for example, the function of the A time-saving gaming state) is installed, and the other functions (for example, the function of the A time-saving gaming state) are installed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine may not be equipped with the functions of the B time-saving gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state). Further, of the functions of the A time-saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state, two functions (for example, the function of the A time-saving gaming state, and the function of the B time-saving gaming state or the C time-saving). It may be a pachinko gaming machine equipped with only a gaming state function) and not equipped with other functions (for example, a B time saving gaming state function or a C time saving gaming state function).

Also, for example, like a pachinko gaming machine called an ST machine, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, 1
Even if the pachinko machine in which the probability change flag is set to ON with a probability of 00% is configured not to have any of the functions of the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state function, and the C time saving game state function. good.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, also for the game board unit and the electrical configuration.
There are some differences from the first pachinko machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later). (For example, a pachinko gaming machine having a function, shape, arrangement position, etc., such as a signal output to a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The explanation of the points in common with the above will be omitted as much as possible.

Further, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine uses the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko gaming machine The explanation shall be given using a code and a step number different from those of the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko gaming machine capable of variablely displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example. Including the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first starting port and the second starting port. There is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequentially variable machine") in which the starting conditions are satisfied in the order of winning.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 has a game area 1105.
Is formed.

The various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120 and the like) are various members arranged in the gaming area 105 (see FIG. 4) of the first pachinko gaming machine. There are some things in common with, but I will explain them once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a guide rail 11.
10, the center accessory 1115 arranged in the substantially central portion of the game area 1105, the first start opening 1120, the general winning opening 1122, the passage gate unit 1125, the special electric accessory unit 1130, and the second start. Mouth 1140A, 1140B and ordinary electric accessory unit 1145
A small hit unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 1010 are provided. In addition, LE
The D unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 1105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 has an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither has a reference sign).
It is composed of. The game area 1105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 by the launching device 1006 is the left side area 1
It flows down 106 or the right region 1107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region 1107.

Further, in the center accessory 1115, a warp entrance 1117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to the stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in the lower front part of the display area of the display device 1007. The stage 1118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 11 where a game ball can enter is behind the center of the stage 1118 in the left-right direction.
19 is formed, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 is the first starting port 1120.
It is configured to be released directly above. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 but has not entered the chance entrance 1119. Mouth 1
It is designed to win (pass) 120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, the first starting port switch 1121
(See FIG. 70 described later). The game ball hit to the right is the first starting port 112.
It may be possible to win a prize at 0. Also, in place of or in addition to the above first starting port 1120,
A first starting port may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize-winning mouth)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007.
It is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 1122, the general winning opening switch 1
It is detected by 123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the general winning opening 11
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to 22 is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the general winning opening 1 is not necessarily limited to this.
In place of or in addition to 122, a right-handed game ball may be provided with a general winning opening.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured to allow the game ball hit to the right to pass through, and the passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. It is a unit body integrated with 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the start information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal symbol is held up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). .. The reserved start information of the normal symbol is used for the hit determination process of the normal symbol. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left side region 1106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 1107.

Further, the passage gate 1126 may be made to function as an opportunity to operate the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the transition condition from the non-big hit gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) to the big hit gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating that the jackpot is a big hit. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126, that is, the detection of the game ball by the passing gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later) causes the accessory continuous operating device to operate. It may be activated to shift to the jackpot gaming state.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 has a big hit opening 1131 and a big hit big winning opening 1.
Big prize opening count switch 1132 for big hits that detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to 131
It is a unit body in which (see FIG. 70 described later) and the special electric accessory 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is a passage gate unit 1125 in the right region 1107.
It is located below.

The big hit opening 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot for jackpot 1131, a jackpot for jackpots where a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a center accessory 1115. A big hit opening for a big hit may be placed at the top of the game.

Further, the big hit winning opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening to be done. Big prize opening count switch 1132 for big hits (Fig. 70, which will be described later)
When the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 1131 for big hit is detected by (see), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 1131 for big hits is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is the big winning opening 11 for big hits.
The open state where it is possible or easy to win (pass) the game ball to 31 and the big winning opening 113 for big hits
It is configured to be able to shift to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win (pass) the game ball to 1. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big hit winning opening 1131 is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the big hit game state is the big hit opening 113.
1 is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the state changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds.

(2nd starting port)
In this embodiment, the second starting port 1140A and the second starting port 1140B are used as the second starting port.
Are arranged in the game area 1105, and these second starting ports 1140A and 1140B are
In both cases, a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win).
It has become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A and / and the second starting opening 1140B.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later). 2nd starting port 114
Regardless of whether the game ball wins in 0A or 1140B, it will trigger the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

The second starting port 1 is provided by the second starting port switches 1141A and 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later).
When the winning (passing) of the game ball to 140A and 1140B is detected, the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the second starting port 1140A, 114
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to 0B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, there are two flow paths 1107a and 1107b on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball, which is hit to the right but does not win the big hit big winning opening 1131. Is formed. The game ball that was hit to the right and flowed further toward the downstream side without winning the big hit opening 1131 is, for example, the branch nail 11 shown in FIG. 69.
By 08, it is distributed to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize. However, most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a are the second starting port 11.
It is not essential to configure the player to win the 40A, for example, the configuration may be such that the winning of the second starting port 1140A can hardly be expected, or a predetermined game ball flowing down the upper flow path 1107a. The configuration may be such that a prize can be won with an expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth). The game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but has not won a prize in the second starting port 1140A is configured to be discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 1178.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 1107b can win a prize, and the details thereof will be described later in the description of the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the lower flow path 1107b side, and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects the winning of a game ball and an ordinary electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electric shutter 1147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) for operating the ordinary electric shutter 1147. The ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, the shutter 1147 for general electric use, has an open state in which a game ball can or easily wins (passes) the second starting port 1140B, and the second starting port 114.
It is configured to be able to shift to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to 0B.
Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 1147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, which is a so-called electric tulip, may be adopted. In addition, the movable member is
Includes blade type, door type, protruding plate type, etc.

(Small hit unit)
The small hit unit 1150 has a small hit large winning opening 1151 and a small hit large winning opening 1151.
A small hit large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball, a small hit shutter 1153 that can move forward and backward, and this small hit shutter 1153. It is a unit body integrated with a small hit solenoid 1154 that can be operated.

The small hit shutter 1153 is moved back and forth in the front-rear direction, so that the small hit large winning opening 115
The open state where it is possible or easy to win (pass) the game ball to 1, and the large winning opening 1151 for small hits
It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to.

If the game ball wins when the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball is detected in the small hit large prize opening count switch 1152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 1151 for small hits is not limited to 10.

Further, the small hit unit 1150 is a lower flow path 1107b and is arranged on the downstream side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 1146, even if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the lower flow path 1107b is small. In order to win a prize in the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side before reaching the winning large winning opening 1151.
It becomes difficult (or impossible) to win a prize in the large winning opening 1151 for small hits.

In this embodiment, the big hit opening 1131 and the small hit big winning opening 1151 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened when the big hit game control process is executed and the big winning opening. The large winning opening that is opened when the small hit game control process is executed may be the same large winning opening.

(Out mouth)
The out port 1178 is a variety of winning openings (for example, first starting opening 1120, second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, big hit opening opening 1131) that are fired toward the game area 1105.
, General winning opening 1122, etc.) is for discharging the game ball that has not won a prize to the outside of the machine. The out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 1122, between the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 and the small hit unit 1150, and the game is played. The game ball flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the aircraft.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit is a sub control circuit 1300.
(See FIG. 70, which will be described later), the moving accessory group 1058, such as a movable accessory, is provided.
The effect group 1058 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 1007. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect effect group 1058 function as the effect effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70
Is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a second pachinko gaming machine. The control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine may be common to the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine, but this will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 1300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, the processing executed when the power is turned on, the processing related to the game operation, and the like, and includes the main CPU 1201, the main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), the main RAM 1203 (read / write memory), and the initial reset. Circuit 1204
It also has a backup capacitor 1207 and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 monitors the operation of the WDT.
(Watchdog timer) and functions to prevent fraud are built-in.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. Main CPU 12
01 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is an I / O that is communicably connected to various devices and the like.
It also includes a port 1205 and a command output port 1206 connected so that various commands can be output to the sub control circuit 1300.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display unit 1161, a normal symbol hold display unit 1162, a first special symbol display unit 1163, a second special symbol display unit 1164, and a first special symbol hold display unit 1165.
2nd special symbol hold display unit 1166, probability change notification display unit 1167, time reduction notification display unit 11
68, a solenoid for general electric power 1148, a solenoid for special electric power 1135, a solenoid for small hit 1154, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 1170, the error notification monitor 1172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. Main control circuit 12
00 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. Further, in the error notification monitor 1172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process are in progress. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a display of a special symbol (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first start port switch 1121 and a second start port switch 1.
141A, 1141B, pass gate switch 1127, big hit opening count switch 1132, general winning opening switch 1123 and small hit big winning opening count switch 11.
52 etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is I / O port 1.
It is output to the main control circuit 1200 via 205.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 1186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. The administrator of the game hall uses the external terminal board 1184, the setting key 1174 operated when changing or confirming the set value in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In the present embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the manager of the game hall (for example, a player) cannot easily touch the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 1174 or / and backs up. It also includes those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 1176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 1400 and the power supply circuit 1450. It may be configured as follows. In this case as well, a third party other than the game hall administrator can use the setting key 1174 or the backup clear switch 1.
It is preferable to prevent easy contact with 176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, and a work R.
AM1303, display control circuit 1304, voice control circuit 1305, LED control circuit 1306
, The accessory control circuit 1307, the command input port 1308, and the like. Sub control circuit 1
The 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 1200.
Although not shown in FIG. 70, an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player is also connected to the sub control circuit 1300.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU
The 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 is a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A that converts image data as an image signal. Equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 1301. note that,
The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 1032. The voice control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, and an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, AM).
(Referred to as P) and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC is sub C
In response to the voice generation command from the PU 1301, one voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the effect group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 1400 launches a payout device 1082 and a game ball capable of paying out game balls. A launching device 1006 capable of enabling the ball lending, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control of ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082, and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / emission control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is a pachinko machine (more specifically, a main control circuit 1200 and a sub control circuit 130.
0, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, etc.) is turned on when the necessary power is supplied.

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but in the following,
The description related to the setting function is omitted.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time saving control is executed, a high probabilistic time saving gaming state in which both probabilistic change control and time saving control are executed, and time saving control being executed although probabilistic change control is executed. A high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state that is not performed, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed although the probability variation control is not executed are prepared.
1 is capable of advancing the game in any of these game states. However, the gaming state progressed by the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. It may not be done. For example, even if the game progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the game does not progress in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal gaming mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed is the regular gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state.
The sub CPU 1301 determines a normal game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left).
For example, control for displaying in the display area of the display device 1007 is executed.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 71 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol stored in.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is the hit determination process of the special symbol (S1034 of FIG. 78, which will be described later).
Reference), ie, the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1.
A table referred to when determining "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "loss" by lottery based on the random value for big hit judgment extracted when the game ball wins in 140A and 1140B. Is. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the first special symbol are "time saving hit", "big hit", and "loss", and "small hit" is not included in the lottery target. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", and "loss". However, "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the random value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535 (65536 types).
It is extracted from. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted big hit determination random value in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, "
The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined by "big hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit judgment value data, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined by "big hit" and this The relationship with the jackpot determination value data corresponding to the above, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data are defined.

Further, the main CPU 1201 has a "time saving hit", a "small hit", a "big hit", or a "loss" based on the extracted random value for big hit determination in the hit determination process of the second special symbol.
To decide. In the hit judgment table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag and the corresponding time saving hit judgment value. Relationship with data, relationship between range (width) of random value for big hit judgment determined by "small hit" and corresponding small hit judgment value data, random value for big hit judgment determined by "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined. To.

In this embodiment, for example, the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol.
When the extracted random value for jackpot determination is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 120
1 is determined to be "time reduction hit", and the winning determination value data is determined to be "time reduction hit determination value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is any of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and wins. The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted random value for jackpot determination is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 120
1 is determined to be "missing", and the determination value data is determined to be "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 is set to ".
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Also, the first
If the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines the determination value data as "big hit". Determined as "big hit judgment value data". When the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 is set to
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". In addition, the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random value is from 22118 to 22118.
In the case of any of 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines the determination value data as "big hit determination value data". Further, the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random value is 22323 to 65535.
If any of the above, the main CPU 1201 determines "missing" and determines the determination value data as "missing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 is set to ".
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Also, the second
If the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random value is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit" and determines the determination value data. Determined as "small hit judgment value data". In addition, the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random value is 22118 to 2.
If it is any of 2968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines the determination value data as "big hit determination value data". Further, when the probability change flag is turned on at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random value is any of 22696 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "missing" and makes a determination. Value data "
It is determined as "missing judgment value data".

As described above, in this embodiment, for example, among the large hit determination random numbers generated in the range of 0 to 65535, 0 to a predetermined width (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the hit determination process of the second special symbol).
), Other judgment value data (for example, excluding the jackpot judgment value data and the loss judgment value data).
It is assigned to the time saving hit judgment value data and the small hit judgment value data). Further, from the predetermined value to the end (for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, 22).
323 to 65535) are assigned to the loss determination value data. Further, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing so, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is increased (or reduced) ( It is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) simply by increasing the size.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed and the winning of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making the probability different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is performed is the "time saving hit" when the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is performed. By making it higher than the winning probability of "", it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

However, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is performed. May be. In this case, for example, if the "time saving game state" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is overlapped, and if the "time saving game state" is won just before the end of the time saving game state, the time saving game state is substantially changed. It will be extended, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit" regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. .. However, when the probability change flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), the main CPU 1201 controls to the time saving game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving game state", but the probability change flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving gaming state.

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 72 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in.

The special symbol determination table is the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140.
When selecting the "selection symbol command" and "symbol specification command" that determine the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in B and the above-mentioned winning judgment value data. (That is, it is a table referred to when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 of FIG. 78, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol determined according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and the "symbol specification command" is a command displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command to specify. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 uses, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201
Select "z1" as the selected symbol command and select "zA1" as the symbol specification command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
The main CPU 1201 selects, for example, a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main C
PU1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "z3" as the symbol specification command.
Select "zA3". In addition, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9,
The main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 60 or more.
If it is any of 99, the main CPU 1201 is "z6" as a selection symbol command.
Is selected, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol specification command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
For example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 120
1 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201
Select "z8" as the selected symbol command and select "zA6" as the symbol specification command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

When the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small hit game control process, for example, the small hit shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to perform the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69).
(See FIG. 69), the prize ball can be paid out by executing the control that the game ball can be won (passed) or easily opened.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selected symbol command and the symbol specification command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 30 to 59, the main C
PU1201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selected symbol command and the symbol specification command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201
Select "z14" as the selected symbol command and select "zA11" as the symbol specification command.

In this embodiment, the winning judgment value data is determined based on the extracted big hit judgment random value with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), and then the special symbol determination table (FIG. 71). (Refer to 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination and the symbol random value of the special symbol, the winning of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, the main RO of the main control circuit 1200
The M1202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when deciding according to the symbol command. Further, the special symbol display unit 1163, 1164 derives a time saving hit display mode, a big hit display mode, a small hit display mode, or a loss display mode based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko gaming machine (FIG. 1).
2 (Refer to (B))) The sub-control circuit 13 also for the decorative symbol stop mode determination table.
It is stored in the program ROM 1302 of 00.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.
It is an example of the hit type determination table stored in. The hit type determination table determines the mode of the winning game state and / or the mode of the subsequent gaming state according to the selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol (that is, described later). S10 in FIG. 78
It is referred to when executing the hit type determination process of 36). The mode of the hit game state shown in FIG. 73 shows the mode of the big hit game state or the mode of the small hit game state. Further, the aspect of the gaming state after that shows the aspect of the gaming state after the end of the hit gaming state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, it is controlled to the C time-saving gaming state without being controlled by the hit gaming state. The aspect is shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 determines that only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to on, and sets the time saving number to 50 times. To decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9", the main CPU 1201 decides to turn on only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number to 100 times. To decide. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the time reduction hit described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode.
Without controlling to the big hit game state, the time saving flag is set to ON and the determined time saving number is set, and it becomes possible to control to the C time saving game state. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the hit game state is not controlled, so that the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the set number of time reductions is the same regardless of the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set number of time reductions may be different depending on the gaming state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions set according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. Is different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the subsequent game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It will be possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time saving gaming state even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "time saving hit" as shown in FIG. 72, and the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit". In this case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display unit 1163, 1164, it is not controlled to the C time saving gaming state. Further, the main CPU 1201 draws a "time saving hit" even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the display mode of the loss is forcibly changed to a special symbol. It may be derived to the display units 1163 and 1164. Moreover,
When the probability variation flag is on, the time reduction hit determination value data may not be assigned to the big hit determination random value, that is, the hit determination process may be performed so that the "time reduction hit" is not included in the lottery result.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the game shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the mode of the hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state are determined as follows. For example, the selected symbol command is "z10".
In the case of ", the main CPU 1201 is the mode of the small hit game state, that is, the small hit large winning opening 1
The number of times 151 (see FIG. 69) is opened is determined to be one. The result of the hit judgment processing of the special symbol is "
In the case of "small hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned small hit display mode to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the determined number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened to make a small hit. It becomes possible to control the winning game state. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 is controlled to the small hit game state without changing the probability change flag and the time saving flag after the end of the small hit game state. Return to the game state just before the flag.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the mode of the hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU1
201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state, and determines that only the probability change flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to on as the mode of the subsequent game state, and the number of probability changes. Is set to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 as a mode of the jackpot game state, respectively.
Rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds will be decided. Further, as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, in each case, it is determined to set both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON, and it is determined to set both the probability variation number and the time reduction number to 10,000 times. .. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state with high accuracy and short game time.

When the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU1
201 is an aspect of the jackpot gaming state, in which the number of rounds is 4 and 1, respectively.
Determine to 0. Further, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is determined that only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. Further, the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to control the game state in a short time. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A time-saving gaming state. In addition, the mode of time saving control in the highly accurate time saving gaming state (
Hereinafter, it is also referred to as “time saving performance”), which is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but may be different from the time saving performance in A time saving.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201
Neither the mode of the winning gaming state nor the aspect of the subsequent gaming state is set. That is,
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 1201 continuously controls the gaming state without shifting the gaming state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent mode of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the modes of the gaming state is set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clearly indicate that neither the mode of the winning game state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 73.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 is extracted when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B with reference to the hit determination table of the special symbol of FIG. The winning judgment value data is determined based on the random value for big hit judgment (winning judgment is performed), and the winning ("short time hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "missing").
To decide. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 72, and the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B and the above-mentioned The type of display mode (for example,) in which the selected symbol command is determined based on the winning determination value data and is derived to the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 (for example).
The type of time saving hit, the type of big hit) is decided. It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that the determination is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the confirmation display. Not the purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is “z6”).
Or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state controlled when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time reduction hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50. Time (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time reduction gaming state is higher than the expected value of the time reduction number in the C time reduction gaming state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous to the player than the C time-saving game state, the position of the "big hit" can be increased. For example, if you win the "big hit" but do not win the "big hit" (
It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest that may occur due to the disadvantage compared to the case of winning the "time saving hit").

In addition, instead of the expected value of the time saving number in the A time saving gaming state being higher than the expected value of the time saving number in the C time saving gaming state, the expected value of the time saving number in the C time saving gaming state is the time saving number in the A time saving gaming state. It may be higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the C time saving game state more advantageous to the player than the A time saving game state, the position of "time saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if the state of not winning the "big hit" continues for a long period of time, if the "time saving hit" is won, it is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time saving gaming state, so that the decline in interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

[2-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 74 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 75 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The columns of "Remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown for convenience for easy understanding. Main CPU
The 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of. The variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol of S1037 of FIG. 78, which will be described later.

In the normal gaming state in which left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to, for example, the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 74.

As shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 74, the main C
The PU 1201 sets a look-ahead flag when the effect selection random value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is a specific random value. The sub CPU 1301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 1201 performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may determine.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is a regular gaming mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, for example, the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol.
It is determined based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (winning), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for effect selection. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made in place of or in addition to any of the above values based on other values or the like.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start of FIG. 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start of FIG. 74. The expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is larger than that in the case of determination. In particular, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, the second special symbol is, for example, approximately 6000.
Variable display is performed for an extremely long time of 00 msec (for example, long fluctuations A to C).
On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for an extremely short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, ultrafast fluctuation). ..

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls a display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and a sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for example, the range of the random value for effect selection is changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined is different. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). In the time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of the variable display times of the special symbol per unit time are provided. The tables referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of may be different.

Further, in the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIGS. 74 and 75, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a reach production that shows. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine, the same as in the first pachinko gaming machine,
The main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 has a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 18). (See FIG. 19) is stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control process]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIG. 42, 86), etc.). ), In the following, the step numbers are changed, including the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine.
The special symbol control process will be described again.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first has a second unit in S1001.
Load the control status number of the special symbol. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area or the like of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 in executing the special symbol control process. ..

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process.
Then, in the main CPU 1201, the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or longer.
, The transmission reservation process of the demo display command for the first special symbol is performed, and when the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the demo display command for the second special symbol is executed. Perform transmission reservation processing. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (S322 in FIG. 45).
(See), which is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demo display effect when the demo display command is a demo display command of the main special symbol.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, but the sub CPU 1301 is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub-special symbol, and the effect control of the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which the left-handed strike is the normal gaming mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and the right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode (the gaming state).
For example, in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbol, display effect of characters and the like, voice effect for the main special symbol, and the like.
For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the sub-special symbol is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the game states in which right-handed is a normal game mode, in the low-accuracy time-shortening game state, other effects are performed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of counting down the number of remaining time reductions until the end of the time reduction game state) may be displayed.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

When it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, the main CPU 1201 processes. To S1003. For example, NO is determined in S1002 during the execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S1002 is YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process in S1004.
Move to.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. The main CPU 1201 is S
After executing the process of 1003, the process is transferred to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the main CPU 1201 processes. To S1006. For example, NO is determined in S1005 during the execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S1005 is YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process in S1007.
Move to.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. Main CPU1
201 transfers the processing to S1007 after executing the processing of S1006.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

When it is determined in S1008 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO in S1008), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the second special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (YES in S1008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 1201 performs processing S1.
Move to 009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. Main CPU1
201 transfers the processing to S1010 after executing the processing of S1009.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing of the variable display start based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

When it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20). 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (YES in S1011), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 1201 performs processing S1.
Move to 012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1012, 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

The main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S).
It is preferable to carry out 1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display can be started without any execution, and when the process related to the first special symbol is not executed and the variable display can be started, the special symbol management process described later is given in the order of priority. Is being executed.

[2-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, S1003 and S100 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).
6. The special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1009 and S1012 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, S1003 or S1009 in which the special symbol management process is in the special symbol control process.
When called and executed by, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when the special symbol management processing is called and executed by S1006 or S1012 during the special symbol control processing, the first special symbol is the processing target. Will be.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S).
1021).

When it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (S1021 is N).
(In the case of O determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S102).
(1 is a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023.
The main CPU 1201 performs the processing after S1023 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S1023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 performs the process S102.
Move to 4.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S1024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S
The process of 1025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82.
When the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 performs the process S1.
Move to 026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. This S
The process of 1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3".
The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. This S
The processing of 1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. This S102
The process of 8 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). When the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 and S1
If it is called in 006, the process is returned to S1007, if it is called in S1009, the process is returned to S1010, and if it is called in S1012, the special symbol control process is also terminated.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the main C in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).
The special symbol variable display start processing executed by PU1201 will be described. FIG. 78 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S1023 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S1023 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S1031).

When it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S10).
(When 31 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (
(When the determination in S1031 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if the determination in S1031 is YES (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, is on (S1032 is NO). If it is a judgment), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

When it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S1032 is NO), the special symbol variable display start processing does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol variable display. End the start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S10).
If 32 is a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a time saving hit, a big hit, or a loss, and the second special symbol is a time saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a loss. It is determined whether or not there is. Further, the main CPU 1201 sets the time saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a small hit. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, set the big hit flag to on. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1035. The time saving hit flag is turned off at the start of the C time saving gaming state, the small hit flag is turned off at the start of the small hit gaming state, and the big hit flag is turned off at the start of the big hit gaming state.

In the hit determination process of the above special symbol (see S1034), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined by this process that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed. Then, if it is determined that the hit is not a small hit in this process, a determination process for determining whether or not the hit is a time saving hit is performed, and if it is determined that the hit is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is the result of the hit determination process (S1034) of the special symbol (for example, time saving hit, small hit, big hit,
Or, it is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referred to, and the symbol random value of the special symbol is used.
The above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol specification command" are determined. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, it is not necessary to determine the stop symbol when the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, but a plurality of types of loss are provided to perform the hit determination process of the special symbol. If the result is a loss, the stop symbol may be determined. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time saving hit, small hit, or big hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hits are used, but one type of big hit may be used, and one type of hit may be one. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of hits, a plurality of types of other hits (for example, small hits) may be provided, or a plurality of types of loss may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S1034) of the special symbol, the reach determination random value and / and the effect selection random. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value and the like. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which left-handed strike is a normal gaming mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). In a gaming state in which right-handed is a regular gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start (see FIG. 75). ) Is referred to to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S1037) of the special symbol is determined.
It is determined as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 77) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. (See S1024) will be performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a parameter update process related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. The main CPU 1201 is S1040.
After executing the process of, the process is transferred to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. The main CPU 1201 executes the process of S1041 and then performs the process of S1.
Move to 042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is used in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300.

The main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and interrupts the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S1041) and transmission reservation process of special symbol effect start command (S1042)). It is preferable to do it within the prohibited section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, S102 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).
The special symbol variable display end processing executed by the main CPU 1201 in Section 4 will be described. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target. Further, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol of the processing target is simply referred to as a "special symbol", and the special symbol of the non-processing target is referred to as "the other special symbol".

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

When it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S10).
(When 51 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (
(When the determination in S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value.
After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded in S1052.

When it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S1053 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the processing in the special symbol management processing (FIG. 77). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S10).
If 53 is a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. Main CPU 1201
After executing the process of S1054, transfers the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
Will be sent to. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs the process S10.
Move to 56.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol (S in FIG. 78).
It is determined whether or not the result of (see 1034) is a small hit.

When it is determined in S1057 that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (when the determination in S1057 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, when it is determined that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (when S1057 is YES determination), the main CPU1
201 shifts the processing to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started or stopped during the execution of the small hit game control process. Main CPU1
201 transfers the process to S1059 after executing the process of S1058.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol (S in FIG. 78).
It is determined whether or not the result of (see 1034) is a big hit.

In S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a big hit (NO determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and processes it. Is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, when it is determined that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit (when S1059 is YES determination), the main CPU1
201 shifts the processing to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started during the execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is in variable display.

When it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not in variable display (S1061)
Is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is in variable display (S1).
(When 061 is YES determination), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test firing test signal will be output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to loss. Main CPU1
201 transfers the processing to S1064 after executing the processing of S1063.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol is hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped due to loss. The main CPU 1201 is S10
After executing the process of 64, the process is transferred to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2".
"Is set. After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 performs the process S1.
Move to 068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. The main CPU 1201 is S1069.
After executing the process of, the special symbol variable display end process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

As described above, in the special symbol variable display end processing of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination processing of this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78). If the result of is a big hit and the other special symbol is in variable display, the process of forcibly losing the variable display of the other special symbol is performed.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, S102 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).
The special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in FIG. 5 will be described. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

When it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S10).
(When 71 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (
(When the determination in S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S1072 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073. On the other hand, in S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol that is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S1072 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small hit.

In S1073, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating a loss (when the determination in S1073 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. The main CPU 120
When the special symbol game end process is performed, 1 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, when it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the small hit (when the determination in S1073 is YES), the main CPU1
201 shifts the processing to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a big hit game control process or a small hit game control process start setting process. In this process, a signal output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (both see FIG. 70) or an island computer (not shown) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 1184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. Main CPU
After performing the processing of S1075, 1201 shifts the processing to S1076.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 120
1 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time reduction flag, and a time reduction counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process (S1077) of setting an upper limit of the number of times of opening the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 1131 for big hits or the large winning opening 1151 for small hits) to be opened, the external terminal board 1184. Jackpot signal set processing (S107
8), the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), the game status specification parameter setting process (S1080), and the transmission reservation process of the jackpot start display command (S1079).
Perform processing such as S1081). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 77). (See S1026) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, S1 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82).
The special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at 074 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 performs a time saving management process (S1091). Since the details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine, the description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this way, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process (S1094) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss,
The main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of loss is derived, the gaming state does not shift.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the main C in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).
The large winning opening opening preparation process executed by PU1201 will be described. FIG. 84 shows the second
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the pachinko machine of.

When this special winning opening opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S11).
(When 01 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (
(When the determination in S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the large winning opening opening number counter value. The big winning opening open count counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the round game executed in the big hit game state when the big hit game control process is executed, and when the small hit game control process is executed. , A counter that counts the number of times the small hit game control process is executed corresponds to this. The count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 1131 for big hits or the large winning opening 1151 for small hits) is opened is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the big hit winning opening 1131 is opened in the big hit gaming state, is, for example, four rounds or four rounds as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73). 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened in the small hit gaming state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit (S1103).
Is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104).
) To switch the control status number, so that the big hit end process (see S1028 in FIG. 77) is performed after the end of the big winning opening opening preparation process. Main CPU 12
01 transfers the processing to S1105 after executing the processing of S1104.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (
S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is used in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300. Then, after the processing of S1106, the main CPU 120
1 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit (S110)
3), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the large winning opening opening number counter value. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs the process S.
Move to 1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened.
In this process, the big hit big prize opening 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the big winning opening for opening when the big hit game control process is executed, and for the small hit when the small hit game control process is executed. The big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. The main CPU 1201 is S110.
After executing the process of 8, the process is transferred to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, big winning opening 1151 for small hit)
), The maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening, etc. are set. The number of times the big winning opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the big hit game control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small hit big winning opening 1151 is opened when the small hit game control process is executed. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round or the small hit game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened / closed as separate processes.
After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1800 msec when the small hit game control process is executed. To. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at the time of executing the big hit game control process, and is set to, for example, 5 at the time of executing the small hit game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning a large prize is set to 10, for example, for both the large prize opening 1131 for big hits and the large prize opening 1151 for small hits. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the large winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big hit, large winning opening 1151 for small hit) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111).
) Is performed to switch the control state number, so that the large winning opening opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process. Main CP
U1201 transfers the processing to S1112 after executing the processing of S1111.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the main C in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).
The large winning opening opening control process executed by PU1201 will be described. FIG. 85 shows the second
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the pachinko machine of.

When this large winning opening opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

When it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S11).
(When 21 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (
(When the determination in S1121 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 is a big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big hits).
, It is determined whether or not the number of game balls won in the small hit large winning opening 1151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, the large winning opening winning counter that counts the number of winning balls to the large winning opening (for example, the big winning opening count switch 1132 for big hits and the big winning opening count switch 1152 for small hits (see FIG. 70)). Etc.), it is determined whether or not the value counted is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The large winning opening winning counter value counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1122, the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big hit, big winning opening 115 for small hit)
When it is determined that the number of game balls won in 1) is not the maximum number of winning balls (S1122 is NO).
(In the case of determination), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small hit big winning opening 1151) is the maximum winning number (S1122).
Is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 is a big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big hits).
, It is determined whether or not the maximum opening time of the small hit large winning opening 1151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

In S1123, the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big hit, big winning opening 1151 for small hit)
) Has not elapsed (NO in S1123).
The main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1123, the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big hit, big winning opening 1 for small hit)
When it is determined that the maximum opening time of 151) has elapsed (YES in S1123), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 is a big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big hits).
, The large winning opening 1151) for small hits is closed. The main CPU 1201 is S1124.
After executing the process of, the process is transferred to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "3" (
By performing S1125) to switch the control state number, the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) is performed again after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the main C in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).
The jackpot end process executed by the PU 1201 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

It should be noted that this jackpot end process is S1 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is processed.
When called in 028, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

When it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S11).
(When 31 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (
(When the determination in S1131 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the processing to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability change flag, time reduction flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and various counters (for example, probability change counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, large winning opening opening count, etc.) are set or reset. The process of setting or resetting the value of the counter, the big winning opening winning counter, the ceiling counter, etc. is performed. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). If the probability variation flag is set to on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to on. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high probability gaming state in which the probability change flag is on. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201
The process is transferred to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. Main CPU 12
After executing the process of S1133, 01 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small hit rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is provided with a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the main CPU 1201 is one of these gaming states. Control to one of the gaming states. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed is a normal game mode, so that the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is mainly executed. Further, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), right-handed is a normal gaming mode, so that the game is played to the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. The second special symbol game based on the winning of the ball is mainly executed. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is used as the first starting opening, it is the first in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 is in another gaming state (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), It becomes a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 114
The electric support control that increases the frequency of operating 6 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. Further, since the big hit winning opening 1131 is not opened unless the big hit game control process is executed, the frequency at which the second starting opening 1140B is opened in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. Low compared to the condition.
Therefore, if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the game ball that is hit right and distributed to the lower flow path 1107b can win the small hit large winning opening 1151. When a game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. Further, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize in the second starting port 1140A. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B, for example, as shown in a hit determination table (see FIG. 71) of a special symbol, 3
Not only is a stop display mode showing a small hit derived with a relatively high probability of 1 / (approximate), but also ultra-fast fluctuation (see FIG. 75) as shown in the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 75). For example, since the variable display time (1000 msec) is executed, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 1151 is in another game state (for example, a normal game state, a high probability time / short game state, a low probability time / short game state). ) Is enhanced. In this way, it is possible to realize a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time saving gaming state and the low accuracy time saving gaming state), the second start port 1140B is opened by executing the electric support control.
Most of the game balls hit to the right and distributed to the lower flow path 1107b are the second starting port 1.
I will win a prize in 140B. Therefore, even if the small hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the expected value that the game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. The game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a is the second.
When a prize is won in the starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the second starting port 11
Only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a will win a prize in 40A. In this way, in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the game value paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.).
The expected value of is not to exceed 1.

Further, in the normal game state, left-handed is a normal game mode, but if right-handed is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is displayed. When it is derived, the ordinary electric accessory 1146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened by winning a game ball in the second starting opening 1140B. However, in the normal gaming state, since the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74), the game ball is tentatively won in the second starting openings 1140A and 1140B. Even so, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long fluctuations A to C having an extremely long fluctuation time, and the frequency at which the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is used as the first starting opening, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the normal gaming state is set to, for example, 0 so as not to generate the actual profit of right-handed hitting. May be good. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and of course, is smaller than the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. ..

In this embodiment, the game is configured to have a small hit rush in a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may be made in a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state in which a special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of a special symbol is executed without executing the electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 and type 2 mixing machine, and the first route and the second route are used as routes until the jackpot gaming state is controlled. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" is derived.
In the second route, the V attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a hit for opening the accessory", and the game ball that has entered the opened V attacker is V. This is the case when the V winning opening in the attacker is won.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the start condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequentially variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the third pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later). (For example, a pachinko gaming machine having a function, shape, arrangement position, etc., such as a signal output to a hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). As for the points in common with, the explanation will be omitted as much as possible.

In explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine uses the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
A gaming board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 87. This gaming board unit 2010 also has a protective glass 4 like the first pachinko gaming machine.
It is arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind 3 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. On the front surface of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 and a guide rail 21 in which a game area 2105 on which a launched game ball can roll and flow is formed.
10, the center accessory 2115 arranged in the substantially central part of the game area 2105, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the general winning opening 2122, and the passing gate unit 212.
5. A special electric accessory unit 2130, a normal electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an out port 2178, and a back unit (not shown) are provided. The LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, a guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 2105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both have no reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is the guide rail 2
Delimited by 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launcher 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 by the launcher 2006 is the left side area 2
It flows down 106 or the right region 2107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region 2107.

Further, in the center accessory 2115, a warp entrance 2117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to the stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. The stage 2118 may be formed of a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 21 where a game ball can enter is behind the center of the stage 2118 in the left-right direction.
19 is formed, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is the first starting port 2120.
It is configured to be released directly above. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 but has not entered the chance entrance 2119. Mouth 2
It is designed to win (pass) 120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-struck game ball can win a prize (a right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, the first starting port switch 2121 (
It is detected by (see FIG. 88 described later). The game ball hit to the right is the first starting port 2120.
It may be possible to win a prize. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, not limited to this, the left-handed game ball is the second.
It may be possible to win a prize in the starting port 2140.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and the extracted starting information. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize-winning mouth)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007.
It is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can be won (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the general winning opening 21
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to 22 is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the general winning opening 2 is not necessarily limited to this.
In place of or in addition to 122, a right-handed game ball may be provided with a general winning opening.

(Passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured to allow the game ball hit to the right to pass through, and the passage gate switch for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. It is a unit body integrated with 2127 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the start information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the start information is extracted.
The extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The various data on hold are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. also,
The passage gate unit 2125 replaces or adds to the right side region 2107 to the left side region 210.
It may be arranged in 6.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning opening 2131, and a large winning opening count switch 2132.
It is a unit body integrated with the special electric accessory 2133. Special electric accessory unit 2130
Is located below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right region 2107.

The large winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this.
In place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is placed, or a large winning opening in which a game ball can win is placed in the upper part of the center accessory 2115. You may do so.

The big winning opening 2131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit gaming state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Is. Large winning opening 2132 by the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later)
When the winning of the game ball to 131 is detected, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. however,
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the large winning opening 2131, and it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball to the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be transitionable to the closed state. The big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above. When the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the big hit game state after passing through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that made it possible.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 has a winning opening in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as prize balls when the gaming ball wins (passes), a switch for detecting the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, and an ordinary electric motor. It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right side region 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate type shutter for general electric power 2147 capable of moving forward and backward, and a solenoid for general electric power 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) for operating the shutter for general electric power 2147. The ordinary electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric use, is in an open state in which a game ball can or easily wins (passes) the second starting port 2140, and the second starting port 2140.
It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to. note that,
Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be adopted.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided on the downstream side of the passing gate 2126 in the right side region 2107. The V winning device 2150 has an opening / closing winning opening 2151 opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, and a V capable of opening / closing the opening / closing winning opening 2151.
A game inside the V-winning device 2150 when the attacker 2152, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 that operates the V-attacker 2152 to open and close the opening / closing winning opening 2151, and the opening / closing winning opening 2151 by the operation of the V-attacker 2152. A V attacker count switch 2153 that detects that a ball has entered, a V winning opening 2155 that allows a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151, and an opening / closing winning opening 2151.
The V winning port switch 2156 that detects that the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 has entered (passed) the V winning opening 2155, and the opening / closing winning opening 2151 enters the inside of the V winning device 2150. A loss opening 2157 through which a game ball that did not enter the V winning opening 2155 can enter (pass), and a V shutter 21 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155.
58, a solenoid for V shutter 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a locking member that can hold only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. It is equipped with 2160. The V winning device 2150 is
It may be provided on the upstream side of the passage gate 2126, or may be provided on the left side region 2106.

The V-attacker 2152 is a member along an arc, and is in a closed state in which the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is always closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the stop display mode indicating that it is a "feature opening hit" described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the solenoid for V attacker 2154 ( The operation of FIG. 88 described later) causes the V-attacker 2152 to operate, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is operated once, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened, for example, by 1800 msec. And V attacker 2
While the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of 152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

The mode for opening the V-attacker 2152 when the stop display mode indicating "per opening of the accessory" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, 900 msec may be opened twice. A predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be closed based on the entry into the inside of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. V winning device 21 by V attacker count switch 2153
When the entry of the game ball into the inside of the 50 is detected, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and sets the value of the V attacker winning counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. to add. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the maximum time that the open / close winning opening 2151 can be opened (for example, 1800 msec)
) Has not passed, but the V-attacker 215 is provided by the V-attacker solenoid 2154.
2 is activated and the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155. That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the jackpot gaming state via the second route described above.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened,
The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued. That is, it is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled via the first route, the round game in which the big winning opening 2131 is changed from the closed state to the open state is executed, whereas the second round game is executed. When controlled to the jackpot game state via the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is changed from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the game is controlled to a big hit game state via the second route, the first round is the V attacker 2.
Although the 152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, for example, a round game in which the large winning opening 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state may be executed from the middle of the round game.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in the open state), V
There may be one attacker that is released in the winning opening and the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the accessory is open is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the V winning opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133 is opened.
When the game ball enters, it is controlled to the big hit game state (the big hit game state via the second route).

The loss opening 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 2155 enters (passes). Lost mouth 2157
The game ball that has passed through is discharged to the outside of the machine. If all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and the game balls do not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V-shutter 2158 has a closing mode in which the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to pass through the V winning opening 2155 due to the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described later), and the V.
A constant operation is always performed between the opening mode in which the game ball can pass (or easily) through the winning opening 2155. In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly performs a constant operation in a cycle (cycle) of 7000 msec in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155, and the V winning device 2150
It is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the. The game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157. Even when a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157.

Further, the locking member 2160 is used for a certain period of time (for example, 3) after the V attacker 2152 is activated.
After 000 msec), the locking of the game ball is released by the operation of the locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155. If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, the loss opening 2157
Pass through. The game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 without providing the locking member 2160.

(Out mouth)
Although the out port 2178 is launched toward the game area 2105, various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 2120, second starting opening 2140, large winning opening 2131, V winning device 2150, etc.
This is for ejecting a game ball that has not won or entered any of the general winning openings 2122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. The out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 2178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting port 2140. The game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the gaming board unit 2010 like the first pachinko gaming machine, and is provided on the rear side of the gaming panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and includes a production accessory group 2058 such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub control circuit 2300. Of these production accessory group 2058, at least one accessory or the effect accessory component constituting the accessory functions as an effectable accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88
Is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko gaming machine. The control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine, but this will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 2300, a payout / launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read / write memory), and an initial reset circuit 220.
4 and a backup capacitor 2207 and the like are provided, and are housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 is a WDT that monitors the operation.
It has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. Main CPU 22
01 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 2203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 is an I / O that is communicably connected to various devices and the like.
It also includes a port 2205 and a command output port 2206 connected so that various commands can be output to the sub control circuit 2300.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display unit 2161, a normal symbol hold display unit 2162, a first special symbol display unit 2163, a second special symbol display unit 2164, and a first special symbol hold display unit 2165.
2nd special symbol hold display unit 2166, time saving notification display unit 2168, solenoid for general electricity 21
48, a solenoid for special electric power 2135, a solenoid for V attacker 2154, a solenoid for V shutter 2159, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 2170, the error notification monitor 2172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 2200.
The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. while checking the settings. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a display of a special symbol (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has a first start port switch 2121 and a second start port switch 2.
141, a passing gate switch 2127, a large winning opening count switch 2132, a V attacker counting switch 2153, a V winning opening switch 2156, and a general winning opening switch 2123 are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 2200 via the I / O port 2205.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 2186 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 2184 or a pachinko machine with a setting function, the setting key 217 is operated when changing or checking the set value.
4. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 according to the operation of the administrator of the game hall is connected.
If it is a pachinko machine with a setting function, use the backup clear switch 2176.
It may be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the manager of the game hall (for example, a player) cannot easily touch the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 2174 or / and backs up. It also includes those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 2176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / emission control circuit 2400 and the power supply circuit 2450. It may be configured as follows. In this case as well, a third party other than the person in charge of the playground can use the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2
It is preferable to prevent easy contact with 176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, and a work R.
AM2303, display control circuit 2304, voice control circuit 2305, LED control circuit 2306
, The accessory control circuit 2307, the command input port 2308, and the like. Sub control circuit 2
The 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200.
Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub control circuit 230 is similar to the first pachinko gaming machine.
An effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player is also connected to 0.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU
The 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A that converts image data as an image signal. Equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 2301. note that,
The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing decorative symbols, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, the image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 2032. The voice control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, and an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, AM).
(Referred to as P) and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC is sub C
One voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the PU 2301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The bonus control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each bonus (for example, one or a plurality of bonuses in the effect group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 and a game ball for paying out the game balls. A launching device 2006 for launching a ball, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082, and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a lending ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / emission control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is a pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, a main control circuit 2200 and a sub control circuit 230).
0, it is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the payout / launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation control is not executed. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which the time saving control is not executed and a time saving gaming state in which the time saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the short-time game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a striking method, which is regarded as a normal game mode, in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 89 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol stored in.

As shown in FIG. 89, when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 is based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the big hit determination random value of the first special symbol. Then, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random value for determining the big hit of the second special symbol. The result of the hit determination process is determined to be "time saving hit", "big hit", or "feature opening hit".

It is not essential that the "feature opening hit" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if the "feature opening hit" is determined. ,
It is preferable that the determination is made only with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed.
In addition, it is not essential that the hit determination process of the second special symbol is not determined as "missing", but if it is determined as "missing", it is "hit for opening the character". It may be higher than the probability determined by, or it may be lower than the probability determined by "per opening of the character".

In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, the first starting port 21
As the data used in the hit judgment process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of 20th, the range of the big hit judgment random value determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "missing" (
The relationship between the width) and the corresponding judgment value data (“time reduction hit judgment value data”, “big hit judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) is defined. In addition, the second starting port 2140
As the data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the prize.
The range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "feature opening hit" and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value" The relationship with "data" and "judgment value data per opening of accessories") is stipulated.

It should be noted that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function of changing the jackpot probability determined as "big hit", but this is not essential, and the probability change flag is turned on according to the type of jackpot, for example. It may be set so that the jackpot probability can be increased.

Further, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random value of the jackpot determination random value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned jackpot determination random value is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability and / and the accessory opening hit probability to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus opening hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus opening hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. May be. However, even if the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all settings.

Further, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and the accessory opening hit probability according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of shortening of time may be changed for each set value. That is, the jackpot probability, the winning probability of opening the accessory, and the opening frequency of the V winning opening 2155 (that is, V).
Expected value controlled to the jackpot game state by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the operation frequency of the attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening the time. May be configured so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 90 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in.

The special symbol determination table is a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the start ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This table is referenced when the "design specification command" is selected. The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 9.
In any of 9, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
The main CPU 2201 selects, for example, a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 61 to 99.
If any of the above, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
Regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2
201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.
Select.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selected symbol command and the symbol specification command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 22
01 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol specification command.
Select.

Further, when the accessory open hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows.
That is, regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CP
U2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "z" as the symbol designation command.
Select "A6".

Although the description is omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine, the main RO of the main control circuit 2200
In M2202, a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the special symbol display unit 2163, 2164, a display mode of a time saving hit, a jackpot display mode, a display mode of a bonus opening, or a loss display mode is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. To. Further, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.
It is an example of the hit type determination table stored in. The hit type determination table shows the mode of the big hit game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol). It is referred to when determining the time saving flag and the time saving end condition). The mode of the gaming state after that shows the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. However, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the time saving game state, it is controlled to the C time saving gaming state without being controlled to the big hit gaming state.
“L” shown in the column in the time saving end condition of FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special symbol, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is opened. The remarks column in FIG. 91 is described for convenience so that it can be easily understood.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and decides the time saving end condition to L = 30, M = 6, N = 3. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end condition to L = 30, M = 3, N = 3. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit gaming state is not determined.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 decides the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag to on, and sets the time saving end condition to L = 50, M =. 5. Determine to N = 2. Also, the selected symbol command is "z".
In the case of "2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time reduction flag to on, and determines the end conditions of the time reduction to L = 50, M = 5, N = 1. do. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and does not set the time saving flag to on. also,
When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines that the time saving flag is set to on, and sets the time saving end condition to L =.
50, M = 5, N = 2 is determined.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "opening of the accessory" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and it is controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the main CP.
U2201 decides the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and decides the time saving end condition to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 2. However, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "opening of the accessory", if it is not controlled to the big hit game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the big hit game state. Not only does it not, but the time reduction flag is not set to on, and after performing control based on the character opening hit, the game state is returned to the state immediately before the character opening hit.

Further, for example, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state. Do not set either. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is lost, the main CPU 2201 continuously controls the gaming state without shifting the gaming state.

When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the mode of the big hit gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state as described above. Since it is not set, it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, for convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the big hit gaming state nor the mode of the subsequent gaming state is determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "missing", the figure is shown. It is illustrated in 91.

Further, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of the end condition of the time reduction in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but are not limited to this, depending on the gaming state. May be different conditions. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, or the A time-saving game state and B may be different. It may be different only in one of the time-saving game states and the time-saving game state C. Further, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. , A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state may be different only in one of the time-saving game states. That is, the end condition of at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to the end condition of at least one of the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. It may be different in the game state.

[3-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 92 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the third pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for convenience so that it can be easily understood. Main C
The PU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and the variation of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determine the pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. 2 Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2201 wins the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the effect selection random value extracted when (passing).

If the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the main CPU 22
01 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol based on the effect selection random value extracted when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120.

If the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "missing", the main CPU 22
01 is based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value extracted when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120. decide. It is considered that the game ball rarely wins a prize in the first starting port 2120 because right-handed hitting is a normal game mode in the short-time game state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2
In 201, a game ball wins (passes) the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol at the second starting port 2140.
It is determined based on the effect selection random value extracted at the time of.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 sets the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value extracted when the game ball wins in 2140.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time. Is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation effect, for example, 600,000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", the game ball basically does not win (pass) the second starting port 2140, but an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 should be used. Even if the game ball wins a prize, it is done in this way in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantager, but it is not always necessary to do so.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the effect selection random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is a specific random number value. Main CPU 22
The sub CPU 2301 that has received the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from 01 is
If the look-ahead flag is set, the look-ahead effect is performed.

For convenience, it does not appear in the variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 92, but in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time saving flag is off, and the time saving flag is turned on. If the probability change flag is on, the look-ahead flag is not set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may determine.

The main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (so that the look-ahead effect is performed) even when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on.
Also, when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, set the look-ahead flag (
(So that the look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

Further, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 92 indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a production. Similarly, the jackpot system reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit or a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine, the same as in the first pachinko gaming machine,
The main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 has a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 18). (See FIG. 19) is stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control process]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIG. 42, 103), etc.). ), In the following,
The same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU
2201 transfers the processing to S2002 after executing the processing of S2001.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 in executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process.
Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the demo display command. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demo display effect. Since the third pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine. There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (S2002 is N).
(In the case of O determination), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S200).
(2 is a YES determination), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the main CP.
U2201 shifts the processing to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2004 is NO), the main CP.
U2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2004 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process in S2005. Move.

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the main C
PU2201 shifts the processing to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. The main CPU 2201 is S
After executing the process of 2003, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol control process (
It is preferable to perform S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt disabled section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) has a higher priority than the first special symbol.
) Has been described, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the main C in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).
The special symbol management process executed by PU2201 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S2003 is YES determination, and S2004 is YE.
In the case of S determination, the first special symbol is the processing target. If the control status number is not 0 (S)
(When 2002 is NO determination), the special symbol being executed is the processing target of the special symbol management process.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S).
2011).

When it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (S2011 is N).
(In the case of O determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S201).
(1 is a YES determination), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. Then, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2012 and then performs the process of S2013.
Move to. The main CPU 2201 performs the processing after S2013 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 performs the process S201.
Move to 4.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control status number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 performs the process S201.
Move to 5.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S
The process of 2015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the V-winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening control process. This process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control status number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 performs the process in S2018.
Move to.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. This S
The process of 2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5".
The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. This S
The process of 2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6".
The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. This S202
The process of 0 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the main C in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).
The special symbol variable display start processing executed by PU2201 will be described. FIG. 95 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine.

If the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly,
Special symbol variable display start processing is S20 during special symbol management processing for the second special symbol to be processed
In the case of the process called in 13, the second special symbol is the process target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

When it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S20).
(When 21 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (
(When the determination in S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 89) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a big hit, or an accessory opening hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, time saving hit, big hit, accessory open hit or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. Main CPU 2
201 transfers the processing to S2025 after executing the processing of S2024.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit (time saving hit, big hit, hit by opening the accessory). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a bonus opening hit is that the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the bonus opening hit. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of time-saving hits, big hits, and bonus opening hits, but there may be only one type of time-saving hits, jackpots, and / and bonus opening hits. .. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of time saving hits, big hits, and / and bonus opening hits, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. The main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2025 and then performs the process of S202.
Move to 6.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol,
As a result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random value and / and the effect selection random value. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S2026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92). After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. It will be. The main CPU 2201 is S202
After executing the process of 8, the process is transferred to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs the process S2.
Move to 031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is used in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S2030), transmission reservation process of special symbol effect start command (S2031)) in the interrupt-disabled section. It is preferable to do it in-house.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the main C in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).
The special symbol variable display end processing executed by PU2201 will be described. FIG. 96 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

When it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S20).
(When 41 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (
(When the determination in S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, after the end of the special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S2 in FIG. 94).
015) will be performed. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
Will be sent to. The main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2043 and then performs the process of S20.
Move to 44.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of executions of the special symbol game). For example, the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).
Return to.

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the main C in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).
The special symbol game determination process executed by the PU 2201 will be described. FIG. 97 shows the third
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine of.

If this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly,
S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol game determination process targets the second special symbol
When called with, the second special symbol is the processing target.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

When it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S20).
(When 51 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (
(When the determination in S2051 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S2052 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S2052 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the opening hit of the accessory, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the loss, NO is determined in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 2186 (both see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time reduction flag and a time reduction counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 2131 is opened (S2055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and a control state number of the special symbol "5". Processing to set to (S2057),
Processing such as game state specification parameter setting processing (S2058) and transmission reservation processing (S2059) of a jackpot start display command is performed. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the completion of the special symbol game determination process,
The large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 94).
See).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a bonus opening hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a bonus opening hit.

In S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped, that is, the special symbol that has stopped is the stop display mode indicating a loss (when the determination in S2060 is NO), the main CPU 22
01 shifts the processing to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the accessory opening hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit (S2).
(When 060 is a YES determination), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per opening of the accessory. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per opening of an accessory) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the V winning device 2150 set in this process
The upper limit of the number of times of opening is, for example, once. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a signal setting process (S2063) for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 2184, and a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S.
2064), game state designation parameter setting processing (S2065), transmission reservation processing (S2066) of a start display command per accessory release, and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. The main CPU 220
When the special symbol game end processing is performed, 1 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving management process (S2071). Since the third pachinko gaming machine, which is called the 1st and 2nd type mixer, is not controlled to the high-accuracy gaming state, the time saving management process executed in the third pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIG. 32 in the first pachinko gaming machine. ~ Figure 3
There are some differences from the process described with reference to 9. Specifically, in the first pachinko machine,
When the probability change flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value
It was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on, but the third pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to the high accuracy gaming state. Therefore, when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on instead of setting it to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Is different. also,
In the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether or not the probability variation flag is off (see S191), S192 is performed on condition that the probability variation flag is off. Although the processing is performed, the third pachinko gaming machine is different in that the processing of S192 is performed without the processing of S191 because the third pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to the high probability gaming state as described above. Regarding other processing in the time saving management processing, FIG. 3 in the first pachinko gaming machine.
The process is the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 39. The main CPU 2201 is S2071
After executing the process of, the process is transferred to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is completed, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process (S2074) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V prize device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the main C in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).
The V winning device opening preparation process executed by the PU 2201 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

When it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S20).
(When 81 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process.
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (
(When the determination in S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 has an open pattern of the V winning device 2150 (
That is, as the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152), for example, the maximum opening time, the maximum number of opening times, and the like are set. In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to open a maximum of 1800 msec only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, a maximum of 900 msec may be opened twice at a maximum. The first time, for example, up to 60
You may open 0 msec and open the second time, for example, up to 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed the specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each opening of the accessory, and among these multiple opening patterns, for example, one of them is based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. It may be set to one open pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device open / close control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the V winning opening 2155 is performed. Main CPU 22
01 transfers the process to S2084 after executing the process of S2083.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084).
), After the completion of the V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed. The main CPU 2201 is S208
After executing the process of 4, the process is transferred to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the V winning device opening display command. The V-winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device open control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

When it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S20).
(When 91 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process.
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (
(When the determination in S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winnings of the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is the value of the maximum number of winnings. To. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2092 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 is the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (
That is, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing winning opening 2151 (maximum opening time) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and performs the process as a special symbol management process (when it is determined). (See FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process in S209.
Move to 4.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection.
In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not it has been detected by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. The above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. For example, the game ball by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set within the specified time after the locking is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that the V prize has been detected (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a game control start setting process per V. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per V) output to the hall computer 2186 (both see FIG. 88) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V-hit game control is executed, for example, a round game of 10 rounds is executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91), so that the player has executed the big hit game control process. As in the case, you can win a large number of prize balls. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-per game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and referred to, but the V-per game control may also be referred to as the jackpot game control process. Main C
After executing the process of S2096, the PU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

Further, in the start setting process of the game control per V in S2093, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time reduction flag and a time reduction counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the winning of the winning combination is processed as the first round game. That is, it was determined that V winning was detected (S2095 is Y).
The game control per V executed by the ES determination) will be started from the second round game. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, an upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S209).
9), V-hit signal set processing to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100), processing to set the control status number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), game status specification parameter setting processing (S).
2102) and processing such as transmission reservation processing (S2103) of the start display command per V are performed. By performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S2 in FIG. 94).
018) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, when it is determined that there is no V winning detection in this S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. Main CPU 22
After executing the process of S2104, 01 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

When it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S21).
11), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (
(When the determination in S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit (S2113)
Is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114)
), The big hit end processing (see S2020 in FIG. 94) will be performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (
S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is used in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300. Then, after the processing of S2116, the main CPU 220
1 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit (S211).
(When 3 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs the process S2118.
Move to.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened.
In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived (S2052 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES). In the case of the big hit game control process, the big winning opening 2131 is selected as the big winning opening to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, and the stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (S2060 in FIG. 97 is determined to be YES).
Further, in the case of the game control per V started by the detection of the V winning (S2095 in FIG. 100 is YES), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the large winning opening to be opened. Will be done. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the large winning prize. The number of prize balls and the like at the time of winning the prize to the mouth 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is set. The number of rounds of opening the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. In addition, in one round, the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150
Is not intended to exclude those that are released multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform control for managing the number of rounds and control for managing the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

The above-mentioned "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the opening large winning opening among the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121).
), After the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

When it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (S21).
(When 31 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (
(When the determination in S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 is the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2.
It is determined whether or not the number of game balls that have won 150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process
Large winning opening count switch 2132 () that counts the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 2131
It is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 (see FIG. 88), is the value of the maximum winning number. To. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is the main R.
It is stored in a predetermined area in AM2203.

In S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is NO), the main C
PU2201 shifts the processing to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is YES).
The main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2134.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 is the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2.
It is determined whether or not the maximum opening time of 150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is YES), the main CPU 22
01 shifts the processing to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 is the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2.
Perform 150 closure treatments. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "5" (
By performing S2135), the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process. Main CPU 2201
Transfers the process to S2136 after executing the process of S2135.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (S21).
(When 41 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S21).
(When 41 is YES determination), the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. Main CPU
2201 transfers the processing to S2143 after executing the processing of S2142.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. Main CPU 22
After executing the process of S2143, 01 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[4. Expansion example]
Hereinafter, an extended example common to the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described above will be described. Since the reference numerals attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the following description describes specific pachinko gaming machines (particularly the third pachinko gaming machine). Unless the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine), the reference numerals are omitted.

[4-1. Extended example of probabilistic control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on according to the type of jackpot, and when the probability variation flag is set to on, the number of probability variations is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be used.

For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process, for example, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the jackpot has passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific region, the jackpot is determined. It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets the probability change flag on at the end of the game control process. In the above specific area, for example, the movable member operates in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, so that the game ball can pass through or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to displace to a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variable machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit When the result is a big hit, the ease of passing the game ball to the above specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and is (A) specified. The figure which shows the case where the opening mode of a region is a 1st opening mode, (B) the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of a specific area is a 3rd opening mode. Is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area. In the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time after being short-opened, but the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104 (A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the large winning opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the large winning opening to the end of the long opening of the large winning opening. ing. Therefore, it is extremely easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is set on very easily at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), in the third opening mode, a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started (both of these two times are short time). )except,
A specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening can pass through the specific area.
It is more difficult than either the open mode or the second open mode. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag is turned on at the end of the big hit game control process. It is set.

Note that FIG. 104 is an example of an opening mode of a specific area in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the big winning opening is easily passed through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. , An example of providing two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, has been described. However, at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening during the execution of the big hit game control process.
The number of open modes of the specific region in which the individual game balls can easily pass through the specific region is not limited to two modes, and may be only one mode or three or more modes.

Further, in FIG. 104, an opening mode of a specific area in which it is difficult to pass through a specific area even if only one of a plurality of game balls winning a prize in the big winning opening is being executed during the jackpot game control process. As an example of the above, an example of providing a third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the big hit game control process, the number of open modes of the specific area where it is difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is 1. The mode is not limited to this, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the winning determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit), the first special symbol and the first 2 The hit selection symbol command of the special symbol is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, for example, in the hit selection symbol command, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. It is selected and "z2" is selected with a selectivity of 50%. If the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit,
For the hit selection symbol command, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%.

FIG. 106 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, the hit selection symbol command is "z0".
In the case of "3", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (3R normal jackpot A) of the third opening mode. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit A) of the third opening mode. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot of the first opening mode (10R probability variation jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit B) of the third opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is the big hit of the first opening mode (
10R Probability change jackpot B) is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 104 to 106 above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 3R normal big hit A with a selectivity of 40%, and 1
With a selectivity of 0%, it is determined to be a 10R normal jackpot A, and with a selectivity of 50%, it is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot A. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selectivity of 15% and 10R probability variation jackpot B with a selectivity of 50%. , 35 is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot C. In this way
The probability change flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit. It is possible to make the probabilities different.

In a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which the specific area is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C), and is described later, for example. As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning). (Example) in which the opening mode is controlled based on the winning of the mouth, (A) the opening mode of the specific region is the first opening mode, and (B) the opening mode of the specific region is the second. It is a figure which shows the case of an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening count is obtained. When the switch detects the winning of the first game ball, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the big winning opening is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area is open. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the specific area is until the winning opening is closed. Does not open, but remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening may pass through a specific area.
It is more difficult than the first open mode. That is, it is difficult to turn on the probability change flag at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability changes at the end of the jackpot game control process. The flag is set to on.

In the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, an example in which the probability change flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. If the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a type 1 / type 2 mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. Although the example to be provided has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an opening mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is performed in both the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. An example that can be determined in the difficult third aspect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one. The game ball may be configured to be determined only in an aspect (first aspect or second aspect) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through a specific area.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is
The large winning opening is open for a short period of time and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started twice (both for a short time), but it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area. If so, the number of times the specific area is opened may be once or may be a plurality of times.

In addition, the closing of a specific area is closed according to the passage of a predetermined opening time or the end of a round in which the specific area is opened, or is closed according to a specified number of large winning openings or winning a prize in a specific area. It may be controlled to do so. Further, one or a plurality of conditions for closing may be combined.

Further, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, the high probability time-shortening game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are set to a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is repeatedly executed alternately until it reaches the limiter. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. It is controlled to (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the number of loops is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of limiters may be a fixed number, for example, may be determined according to a symbol random value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting machine, the number of limiters may be different depending on the set value.

In the above, the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state. And the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached. In particular, it is effective when it is a type 1 type 2 type mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability change machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the probability change control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth big hit game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined number of limiters has been reached.
The game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, the game does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, but the game is played in the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. The same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process.

Further, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the probabilistic change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-shortening game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which the probability variation control is not executed when the special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “ST number”) may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may be different depending on the set value. Further, for example, it may be a so-called fall-type gaming machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the probability variation control is completed based on the result of the fall lottery. For example, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area during the big hit gaming state. It may be a so-called V probability variation type gaming machine in which probability variation control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[4-2. Extended example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control may be executed after the big hit game control process is completed. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random value among the random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening (for example, for special symbol hit determination). A random value, a special symbol symbol random value, etc.) may be used to perform a time reduction winning determination process for determining whether or not to execute the time reduction control, in addition to the special symbol hit determination process. When the time saving hit judgment is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, for example, the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a specific symbol disorder. If it is a numerical value, it can be determined as a "time reduction hit" in which the time reduction control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning determination process may be performed.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is performed separately from the special symbol hit determination processing, the time saving winning determination processing may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame.

Further, when the above-mentioned time-saving winning determination processing is performed, a random number for determining the time-saving winning, which is exclusively used for the time-saving winning determination processing, is generated in a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving winning is applied based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time-saving winning determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning.

Further, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball at the starting opening, and it is not essential to extract it in other areas (for example, general winning opening, small hit winning opening, etc.). It may be extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening, etc.). Further, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination processing is provided, and a random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted based on, for example, that the game ball has passed through this dedicated area. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time saving winning determination process and the special symbol hit determination processing are executed at different timings, the time saving winning determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the confirmation display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time saving hit determination process may be "time saving hit". In such a case, in the main CPU, the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit".
Nevertheless, for example, it is preferable to forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving loss".

In addition, the sub CPU can visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or an easy effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern or a character). It is preferable to execute control to display the display effect (such as display effect by) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time saving winning determination processing is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination processing, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is possible to visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or instead of displaying an easy effect image on the display device, the time saving winning judgment is made. A display device for displaying an effect image (for example, a change effect of a decorative pattern, a display effect by a character, etc.) in which it is impossible or difficult to visually grasp whether the processing result is a "time reduction hit" or a "time reduction loss". You may perform the control to display in. In this case, it is possible to maintain the interest until the result of the time saving winning determination process is disclosed.

Further, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image showing, for example, a right-handed instruction as a method of launching a game ball recommended in the big hit gaming state. It is controlled so that it is displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
In this respect, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU performs the time reduction control. As a recommended method of launching a game ball, for example, an effect image indicating a right-handed instruction is controlled to be displayed on the display device. However, when the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the effect image showing the recommended method of launching the game ball when the time saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, the number of time reductions set based on the "time reduction hit" is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 2).
If it is more than once), it may be displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than twice), it may not be displayed. The above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the condition of the number of time reductions, and may be an arbitrary condition as appropriate.

Further, if the time reduction winning determination processing is executed before the special symbol hit determination processing is executed, the sub CPU is in a situation where the time reduction hit is set (that is, a situation in which the time reduction flag is set to ON). A control may be executed to display an effect image that can be grasped or easily grasped by the appearance on the display device, whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed.

It should be noted that the type of random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the extraction timing of the random value used for the time-saving win judgment process, the condition for determining the time-saving hit in the time-saving win judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving win judgment process, and the time-saving win judgment process. The game state that can be executed, the mode of the time saving game state, the time saving number set at the time saving hit, the start timing of the time saving game state, the end timing of the time saving game state, the time saving number rewriting timing, the time saving hit probability, and the time saving winning judgment. The following is a summary of the processes related to time saving, such as displaying the results of the processes.

(Type of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The random number values used in the time saving winning judgment processing are, for example, a random value for determining a special symbol hit, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a normal hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, a random value for determining a special symbol fall, and a random value for determining a fall. It may be any one of a plurality of types of random values such as a dedicated time-saving winning determination random value. Further, if it is a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time saving winning determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

Further, the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving winning judgment random value), and a plurality of types of random values (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value and a symbol determination random value). ) May be used to determine.

(Extraction timing of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is such that when the game ball wins the starting port that triggers the special symbol hit judgment processing, the game ball passes through the passing gate that triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit judgment processing. Time, when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving hit judgment process, etc.
It may be any timing. In addition, the extraction of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning opening or the like in which the prize ball is paid out, or a specific gate or a specific out where the prize ball is not paid out. It may be done based on the passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, when the random value for the time saving winning judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting opening, when the game ball wins in either the first starting opening or the second starting opening. Even if there is, the random value for determining the time saving win may be extracted, or the random value for determining the time saving winning may be extracted only when the game ball wins at one of the specific starting openings.

(Conditions for determining time reduction hit in the time reduction hit determination process)
When the time-saving winning judgment processing is performed using the extracted time-saving winning judgment processing random value, the extracted time-saving winning judgment random value is a specific time-saving winning judgment random value (for example, specific time-saving winning judgment value data). It is advisable to make it judged as a time saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving winning judgment processing using the special symbol hit judgment random value, the time saving is shortened when it is a specific loss judgment value data, a specific small hit judgment value data and / or a specific big hit judgment value data. It is good to judge it as a hit. In addition, when executing the time saving hit determination process using the symbol random value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that it is a time saving hit when it is a specific lost symbol, a specific small hit symbol, or a specific big hit symbol. .. Further, when the time saving hit determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the specific special symbol fall determination random value value data is used. Further, when the time saving winning determination process is executed using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the normal hit determination random value or the normal symbol determination random value. Furthermore, the condition for determining a time-saving hit in the time-saving hit determination process is
Not limited to the above conditions, various conditions can be arbitrarily determined.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the hit of opening the accessory. When the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 2152 is opened, whether or not to execute the time saving control and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of the accessory opening. It is good to do so. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the V winning opening 2
If the passage of the game ball to 155 is not detected and the big hit game control process is not executed, the main CPU 2201 will perform a "time reduction hit" if the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit".
It is advisable to determine whether or not the time reduction control is executed and the number of time reductions based on the above. However, the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving loss", the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened. If does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time saving winning judgment processing)
When the time saving winning judgment process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for the time saving winning judgment acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting port, the main CPU performs the start information of the special symbol. Similarly, it is advisable to reserve the acquired random number value for determining the time reduction.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time saving winning determination process immediately (for example, before it is held) when the random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted, or the extracted random number value is reserved. The time saving winning determination processing may be executed until the variable display of the special symbol is started, or the time saving winning determination processing may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Game state in which the time saving winning judgment process can be executed)
The time reduction winning determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the high accuracy non-time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state, and the time reduction control may not be executed in the game state (for example, normal). It may be executed only in the gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). Further, for example, the time saving winning determination process is executed in any of the gaming states.
Conditions for executing the time-saving winning determination process, such as executing the time-saving winning determination process only in a specific game state, are set in advance so that the time-saving winning determination process is executed when the specified conditions are satisfied. May be good.

(Mode of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning determination process may be the same mode or different modes. For example, a first time saving flag and a second time saving flag are prepared, and when the time saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time saving flag is set to on and based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing. When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to on. In this case, it is preferable to execute the time saving control having different functions depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on and the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set to on, both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the special figure shortening control and the electric support are performed. Only one of the controls can be performed. When the first time saving flag is set to on, the control is performed in the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to, it may be controlled to the second time-shortening gaming state in which only the electric support control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags is set to be turned on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on, for example, the result of the time saving winning determination processing, or the time saving winning determination processing is executed. It may be decided according to the game state at the time of being played.

(Time reduction number set at the time of time reduction hit)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a plurality of time saving winning judgment random numbers are specified as time saving hit judgment value data, the set time saving number of times is set to the gaming state when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed. Alternatively or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random value for determining the time saving. For example, the random value for determining the time saving hit, which is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, is the first.
In the case of the time reduction hit determination value data, the number of time reductions is determined to be "100", and in the case of the second time reduction hit determination value data, the number of time reductions is determined to be "50".

In addition, a gaming state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a highly accurate time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.).
Even so, the time reduction winning determination process is executed, and when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit", the main CPU determines the number of time reductions based on the "time reduction hit".
Instead of the time saving remaining number, a new set (that is, resetting the time saving remaining number) may be made. In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the number of times of time reduction newly set is larger or less than the number of times of time reduction remaining, and the range of gameplay is widened. It is possible to have a hobby and enhance the interest.

In addition, a gaming state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a highly accurate time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.).
Even so, the time reduction winning determination process is executed, and when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit", the main CPU determines the number of time reductions based on the "time reduction hit".
It may be added to the time saving remaining number of times. In this case, since the number of remaining time reductions is not less than the current number of remaining time reductions, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition, a gaming state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a highly accurate time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.).
Even if the time saving hit determination process is executed, if the result of the time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU keeps the time saving number determined based on the "time saving hit". The process of newly setting instead of the number of times and the process of adding the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" to the remaining number of time reductions are determined in advance to satisfy this predetermined condition. The number of time reductions may be set according to the embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine in which the time saving control having different functions is executed when the first time saving flag is set to on and when the second time saving flag is set to on.
When the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU determines that the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" have the same function. The process of setting the number of time reductions may be changed depending on whether the time reduction control has a different function. For example, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving controls having the same function, the time saving number determined based on the "time saving hit" is used as the remaining time saving number. If the time saving control that is added and executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions, the time saving control is based on the "time saving hit" instead of the remaining number of times that the time saving is being executed. The number of time reductions determined in the above process may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on "time saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time saving times during execution are exhausted, the time saving based on "time saving hit" is performed. Control may be performed.

When the number of time reductions is set based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time reductions to be set is determined to be "0", the time reduction flag is set to on even though the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". Further, when the result of the time reduction winning determination process performed during the execution of the time reduction control is "time reduction hit" and the number of time reductions is set to "0", the execution time reduction control is terminated.

(Start timing of time reduction control)
The start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit" can be the end time of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time reduction control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process.
Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing is the end time of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning determination processing becomes the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time saving hit judgment process is "time saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a big hit, "time saving hit" is invalidated (based on "time saving hit"). It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on) and the time saving flag is set on based on the hit time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of big hit).

Further, the start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction hit determination process is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame, even if the time reduction control is started immediately (before the special symbol hit determination processing is performed) based on the result of the time reduction winning determination processing. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing and the time of executing the time saving winning judgment processing, which can enhance the interest. Will be.

Further, the start timing of the time saving control to be executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination process being "time saving hit" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been executed. In this case, after the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU executes a fanning effect of whether or not the time reduction control is started until the time reduction control is started. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends. Based on the above, it is advisable to start the time saving control based on the jackpot. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which the time reduction control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155. Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the end of the jackpot game control. Further, the V-attacker 2152 is released based on the fact that the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the accessory opening hit. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed,
The main CPU may start the time saving control based on the "time saving hit" based on the opening / closing winning opening 2151 being closed.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time reduction game state ends is, for example, "when the variable display of the special symbol is executed over the set number of time reductions in the game state where the time reduction control is executed" and "in the game state where the time reduction control is executed". , When the game is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or" When the number of time reductions is set to 0 even though the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a time reduction hit ", etc. Is.

If the small hit game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the time reduction control is continuously executed even after the small hit game control process is completed. Will be done.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening / closing winning opening 2 is derived from the stop symbol mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening hit of the accessory during the execution of the time saving control.
When 151 is opened, but when the V attacker 2152 is opened, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CP.
The U2201 continuously executes the time saving control even after the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is closed.

(Rewriting the number of time reductions)
When the time saving winning determination process is executed in a gaming state (for example, high accuracy time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state, etc.) in which the time saving control is executed, and the result of this time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit".
The main CPU may rewrite the time reduction number or may not rewrite the time reduction number (that is, the time reduction control may be executed until the time reduction number in the running time reduction control is exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" when the number of time reductions in the running time reduction control is exhausted. It may be set at the time of executing the special symbol hit determination process, at the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol, at the time reduction winning determination process, or at various timings. can do. In addition, when it is set at the time of the time reduction winning determination processing, the time reduction number determined based on the "time reduction hit" is overwritten with the time reduction number in the execution time reduction control. Further, the number of time reductions may be set in any of "rewriting the number of time reductions" and "adding to the previous number of time reductions" in a manner satisfying the predetermined conditions.

(Probability of shortening the time)
When the time saving winning determination process is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening, the time saving winning determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening (hereinafter, "No. 1"). The time saving hit probability is referred to as "1 time saving winning determination process") and the time saving winning determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time saving winning determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening. May be different. For example, it is second than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving hit determination process is performed.
The time saving hit probability when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed may be increased, or when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed rather than the time saving winning probability when the second time saving winning judgment processing is performed. The time saving hit probability may be increased, or the time saving hit probability may be the same or almost the same in the case where the first time saving winning determination process is performed and the case where the second time saving winning determination process is performed.

(Display of the result of the time saving winning judgment process)
The number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction winning judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (whether it is a time reduction hit or the time reduction loss) and / and the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (time reduction hit). May be provided with a winning time reduction number display unit to display. The time reduction winning determination result display unit and / and the winning time reduction number display unit may be provided in an LED display group provided with a special symbol display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU may display the result of the time reduction winning determination process and / or the number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction hit on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. good.

(interval)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game. The interval time may be longer than the above interval time when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a “time reduction loss”. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the bonus opening hit and the big hit game control process is not executed based on this bonus opening hit, the main CPU 2201 loses the time saving. The interval time after the end of the operation for opening the accessory when the result of the judgment process is "time saving hit" is made longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Extended example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described in the present specification play a game using a gaming medium, and a privilege (for example, a privilege (for example,) is based on the result of the gaming.
It can be applied to all gaming machines to which a prize ball, prize data, etc.) are given. That is,
The game is played by launching or throwing a game medium (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. The main control circuit itself may be capable of electromagnetically managing the game medium owned by the player and performing a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. In addition, the electromagnetic management of the game medium owned by the player is attached to the main control circuit (
It may be a game medium management device that manages the game medium (connected).

In the case of a gaming machine that circulates the enclosed gaming balls to play a game, the gaming balls as a gaming medium are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that the prize balls will be paid out when a prize is won. Instead, prize ball data as a game medium is given. In this specification, the "game value to be paid out" includes the meaning of both the prize ball and the prize ball data. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls is given to the enclosed gaming machine. Further, the game value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball and the prize ball data, and may be any one corresponding to the prize ball and the prize ball data.

Further, when the gaming medium management device connected to the main control circuit manages the gaming medium management device, the gaming medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the gaming machine.
It is connected to a bidirectional communication function via an external game medium handling device (not shown) and a predetermined interface, and is necessary for the game medium lending operation (that is, the player to perform the game medium loading operation). Win a prize (operation to provide a game medium) or a role related to paying out a game medium (
When the winning combination is established), the operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the operation of acquiring the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium to the player) or the game medium to be used for the game. It suffices that the operation of electromagnetically recording can be performed. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media.
A device for displaying the number of owned game media (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine to display the number of owned game media, and the number of game media displayed on the device for displaying the number of owned game media is managed. You may. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, the recording medium is not limited to being discharged, and cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko gaming machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachi-slot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area.
When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid.
The ball feed pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball is configured to be launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the enclosed gaming machine can avoid a so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine. Further, without providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game ball polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game machine are provided. May be good. In this case, the capture mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to capture, or may be configured to capture from a winning opening provided in the game area.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed gaming machine, the gaming ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the gaming ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, to get a ball
It means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. Further, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. Further, for example, at the end of the game, the entire game value (that is, the ball held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be settled, or a part of the ball held may be transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls held is integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held is reduced. .. Furthermore, there is no concept of a foul ball in a type of gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from above the gaming area, but a foul ball is generated when a gaming ball is launched from below as in a conventional gaming machine. sell. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine of a type in which a gaming ball is launched from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball is generated.
In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases depending on consumption, lending, and payout. Further, the "data on the increase / decrease in the game medium due to the consumption, lending and payout of the game medium" is the data on the decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of the game ball and the increase in the number of balls held due to the lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine.
Conversion from game value managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting of possession balls (ball lending)
Accept the request for return). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by a game media management device. In this embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange or the like in a game field or the like where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening may be continuously detected by the door opening sensor. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored.
Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The enclosed gaming machine may be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming ball. For example, the enclosed gaming machine is of a type in which the gaming ball is circulated only by the gaming machine without being circulated by the island equipment. , And the type in which the gaming ball circulates in the island equipment but the player cannot touch the gaming ball, etc. are also included in the enclosed gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received are the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with either one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set aside from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is not only confirmed that the regular signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the regular signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities. Further, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game medium management device by communication, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game medium management device, and the main control circuit is connected to the main control circuit via the frame control circuit. A communication connection with the game medium management device may be made. In addition, a launch control circuit is provided separately from the main control circuit.
A frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the launch control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel,
The main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the other Control is performed to forcibly stop the special symbol of the above with a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol,
As described above, the game shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, but in this jackpot gaming state, neither the starting condition of the first special symbol nor the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, and the main C
The PU does not newly perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol.
Based on the transition from the general gaming state to the small hit gaming state (stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the small hit gaming state is changed to the general gaming state. Based on the transition (end of the small hit game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the small hit gaming state as described above, but in this small hit gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the second special None of the start conditions of the symbol was satisfied, and the main CPU was the first.
Neither the variable display of the special symbol nor the variable display of the second special symbol is newly performed. however,
When both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed and one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU is in the variable display of the other. Regarding the special symbol of, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the LED group is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In the present specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples, but the techniques described in the present specification may be referred to as other pachinko gaming machines such as pachislot machines. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technique described in the present specification is applied to either a pachinko gaming machine or a pachislot machine, a temporary stop by a reel may be included in an effect accompanied by a temporary stop of a symbol. The "stop" of the symbol includes a main stop and a temporary stop, and the interpretation of "stop" may be either. Further, the operation for performing the game by the player may be any operation such as operation of a lever, a handle, a button, touch, or the like.

In pachinko gaming machines, the manager of the gaming machine may set the effects, etc. by operating the effect buttons, but after the settings by the effect buttons, the player may be operated to start the game. be. In this case, as a result, it is assumed that the operation by the administrator becomes the operation for the player to play the game. Similarly, in pachislot, the manager plays a two-bet game,
In some cases, it is assumed that the player plays a 3-bet game with the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game established. In this case, although the player can play either the 2-bet game or the 3-bet game, the manager of the gaming machine may play the 2-bet game, so that the game played by the manager (for example, 2). Bet games, etc.), selection of hole menus, etc. may be operations for the player to play a game.

In pachinko gaming machines, the player's game method is managed by notifying whether the player is right-handed or left-handed under the control of the main CPU, and if the player's game method is not intended, a game such as an error or a warning is issued. It may be notified by the control of the sub CPU that it is unintended.

In pachislot, the main CPU is the player's game method, such as the push order (assist) by the player.
It may be managed by the control of, but when the game method of the player is not intended,
It is also possible to notify by the control of the sub CPU that the game such as an error or a warning is unintended.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but one board may be used. In the pachislot machine, the payout control board may not exist, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the main control board and the payout control board may be separated.

In addition, the pachislot usually has a rectangular housing that houses devices necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the housing, but the housing in the pachislot can be regarded as a frame. It is possible. On the other hand, in pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as a housing, the outer frame and the base door are regarded as a housing, and the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, the base door, the glass door and the dish unit is regarded as the housing, etc. Is possible. A unit, a middle frame, an intermediate portion, etc. provided with various control boards may exist between the housing and the door, or between the frame and the door, and the door, the frame, the housing, etc. There may be various control boards, display means, decorative parts, accessories, and the like.

[5. First Embodiment of the Fourth Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The fourth pachinko gaming machine has a first embodiment and a second embodiment, and both embodiments are referred to as a one-kind two-kind mixing machine like the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a pachinko game machine. The first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine differ from the third pachinko gaming machine in the basic specifications of game playability, and the various members arranged in the gaming area accordingly. The configuration is partially different.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, as in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol. however,
The present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequentially variable machine may be used.

First, a first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described, and then a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. Hereinafter, in explaining the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko gaming machine are designated by the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and the configurations thereof and the like. A detailed description of the process will be omitted.

<First Embodiment of the Fourth Pachinko Game Machine>
[5-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 108, the gaming board unit 3 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
010 will be described. The gaming board unit 3010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The game board unit 3010 includes a game panel 3100, various members are arranged on the game panel 3100, and a game area 105 on which a launched game ball can roll and flow is formed on the front surface of the game panel 3100. ..

As shown in FIG. 108, the gaming board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine mainly has the first passing gate 3126A and the first passing gate 3126A as compared with the first pachinko gaming machine.
The configurations and arrangements of the second passage gate 3126B, the first starting port 3120, the second starting port 3140, the ordinary electric accessory unit 3145, the special electric accessory unit 3130, and the V winning device 3150 are different. .. Each configuration and its arrangement will be described below.

(1st passage gate)
The first passage gate 3126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that the left-struck game ball can pass (the right-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to pass). ing. The first passing gate 3126A is provided with a first passing gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 109 described later) for detecting the passage of the game ball to the first passing gate 3126A.

(2nd passage gate)
The second passage gate 3126B is a normal electric accessory unit 314 described later in the right side region 107.
It is arranged below 5 so that only a game ball hit to the right can pass through. The second passage gate 3126B is provided with a second passage gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B.

When the game ball passes through the first passing gate 3126A or the second passing gate 3126B (hereinafter, also referred to as “passing gates 3126A, 3126B” as appropriate), a normal symbol lottery and variable display of the normal symbol are performed. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B, the prize ball is not paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

Further, the passing gates 3126A and 3126B may be made to function as a trigger for operating the accessory continuous actuating device. Assuming that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous operating device may be operated when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B to shift to the jackpot gaming state.

This also applies to the passage gate 126 of the first pachinko gaming machine and the passage gate 2126 of the third pachinko gaming machine described above.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 3120 is the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A (that is, directly below the first passing gate 3126A), and is approximately 1 from the first passing gate 3126A.
The game balls are arranged close to each other at a distance. Further, the first starting port 3120 is arranged so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter by a game nail or the like, except for the game ball that has passed through the first passage gate 3126A.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the first special symbol, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls) are paid out. Become.

In the present embodiment, the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A is set to the distance of about one game ball, but the distance of about one or two game balls may be used. Originally, the shorter the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A, the better.
In order to make the functions of the first starting port 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A independent from each other, a distance of at least one game ball should be provided between the first starting port 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A. Is desirable.

By arranging the first starting port 3120 in close proximity to the first passing gate 3126A in this way, the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A is immediately placed in the first starting port 31.
20 will be entered, and the start time of the variable display of the normal symbol triggered by the passage of the game ball to the first passing gate 3126A and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 will be the trigger. It is possible to adjust the start time of the variable display of the special symbol (variable display can be started at approximately the same time).

Further, by arranging the first starting port 3120 so that it is difficult to enter a ball other than the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, but the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Preventing the event that only the game is performed, the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120, and the normal display triggered by the passage of the game ball to the first passing gate 3126A. The variable display of the symbol can be operated as a set.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 3140 is arranged so that a right-struck game ball can enter (a left-struck game ball is difficult or impossible to enter).

When a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the second special symbol, or a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out. Become.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 3145 has a winning opening in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as prize balls when the gaming ball enters, a switch for detecting the entry of the game ball into the winning opening, and an ordinary electric accessory unit. It is a unit body integrated with the object 3146, and is arranged in the right side region 107. In the present embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 3140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 3141.

The ordinary electric accessory 3146 has a protruding plate type shutter for ordinary electric power 3147 that can move forward and backward, and a solenoid for ordinary electric power 3148 that operates the shutter for ordinary electric power 3147 (FIG. 109 described later).
See) and. The ordinary electric accessory 3146, that is, the shutter for general electric use 3147, is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 3140 or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 3140. It is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state.

Specifically, the general electric shutter 3147 has a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion arranged in front of the entrance of the second start port 3140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guidance portion inclined toward the second start port 3140. It is composed of. When the shutter 3147 for general electric power is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion projects a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100 to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 3140. Without obstruction, the plate-shaped entry guiding portion projects a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side region 107, and accepts the accepted game ball. 2 Guide to the starting port 3140. On the other hand, when the shutter 3147 for general electric power is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion projects from the surface of the game panel 3100 at a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball to the second starting port 3140 of the game ball. The plate-shaped ball entry guide portion is buried in the surface of the game panel 3100 to prevent the ball from entering the ball, and the ball is allowed to flow downward without being received by the game ball flowing down to the right side region 107. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 3147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be adopted.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 includes a large winning opening 3131, a large winning opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109 described later) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 3131, and a special electric accessory 3133. It is an integrated unit body. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is arranged downward in the right side region 107.

The large winning opening 3131 is arranged in the right side region 107 so that a right-handed game ball can enter (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to enter). However, it is not limited to this, and a large winning opening where a left-handed game ball can enter is arranged, or a large winning opening where a game ball can enter is arranged at the upper part of the center accessory 115. You may try to do it.

The big winning opening 3131 is a winning opening that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be entered when controlled to a big hit gaming state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. be. When a game ball enters the large prize opening 3131, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

The transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 3131 is the first route when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" is derived, and the special symbol determination. The V-attacker 3152 is opened by deriving the stop display mode indicating that the result of the above is "per opening of the accessory", and the game ball that has entered the opened V-attacker 3152 is the V winning opening in the V-attacker 3152. This is the second route when you win a prize.

The special electric accessory 3133 includes a special electric shutter 3134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 3135 (see FIG. 109 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 3134. The special electric accessory 3133, that is, the special electric shutter 3134, is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the large winning opening 3131 or is easily closed, and in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 3131 or is difficult to enter. It is configured to be transitionable to the state.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 3134 is composed of an opening / closing door whose lower portion is pivotally supported.
When the special electric shutter 3134 is in the open state, the opening / closing door falls to the front side and the big winning opening 3
131 opens, accepts the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and guides the accepted game ball to the big winning opening 3131. On the other hand, when the special electric shutter 3134 is in the closed state, the opening / closing door is inverted and the large winning opening 3131 is closed, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 3131.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 3150 is provided on the downstream side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 3145 in the right side region 107. The V winning device 3150 includes an opening / closing winning opening 3151 opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 3150, a V attacker 3152 capable of opening / closing the opening / closing winning opening 3151, and the V attacker 3152. Operate to open and close winning opening 31
A solenoid for V-attacker 3154 that opens and closes 51, a V-attacker count switch 3153 that detects the entry of a game ball into the opening / closing winning opening 3151, and V from the opening / closing winning opening 3151.
V winning opening 3155 through which a game ball that has entered the inside of the winning device 3150 can pass, and V winning opening 3
V winning opening switch 3156 that detects that the game ball has passed through 155, and opening / closing winning opening 31
Of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 from 51, the loss opening 3157 through which the game ball that did not enter the V winning opening 3155 can pass, the V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 3155, and this V shutter. It is equipped with a solenoid for V shutter 3159 that operates 3158 to open and close the V winning opening 3155. The V winning device 3150 may be provided on the upstream side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 3145, or may be provided on the left side region 106.

The V-attacker 3152 is composed of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and the V-attacker 3152 is advanced forward so that the game ball cannot enter the opening / closing winning opening 3151 or is in a closed state. , V-attacker 3152 can be moved backward to allow the game ball to enter the opening / closing winning opening 3151 or to be easily opened.

The opening / closing winning opening 3151 is a winning opening opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 at the time of "opening the accessory", and up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be entered per opening. It has become. When a game ball enters the opening / closing winning opening 3151, the value of the V attacker winning counter is added, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

The V winning opening 3155 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 4000) after the V attacker 3152 is opened.
This is a winning opening that triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above, provided that the game ball has passed within msec).

When the game is controlled to the jackpot game state via the second route, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155 with the opening of the V attacker 3152 when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155 as the first round. After that (after the second round), a round game is executed in which the large winning opening 3131 is changed from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the big hit game state is controlled via the second route, the V winning opening 315 is so that the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued.
Even after the game ball has passed to 5, the round game in which the V-attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 3133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 3134 is opened), V
There may be one attacker that is released in the winning opening and the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that "the accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 3134 is opened, and the V winning opening 3155 provided inside the special electric accessory 3133 is set.
When the game ball enters, it is controlled to the big hit game state (the big hit game state via the second route).

The loss opening 3157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 3155 enters (passes). Lost mouth 3157
The game ball that has passed through is discharged to the outside of the machine. If all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 pass through the loss opening 3157 and the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 3155, the game ends without being controlled by the jackpot game state. It becomes.

The V-shutter 3158 is a solenoid for V-shutter 3159 (see FIG. 109 described later).
The closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155 due to the operation of
It operates with an open mode in which the game ball can (or easily) pass through the V winning opening 3155.

[5-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly corresponds to the main control circuit 200 that controls the game and the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 300 that controls the effect, a payout / launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200 is partially different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a solenoid for general electric power 3148 and a solenoid for special electric power 3
135, solenoid for V attacker 3154, solenoid for V shutter 3159, 1st
Start port switch 3121, 2nd start port switch 3141, 1st passage gate switch 312
The configurations of 7A, the second passage gate switch 3127B, the large winning opening count switch 3132, the V attacker counting switch 3153, and the V winning opening switch 3156 are partially different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be described below.

Further, since the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability variation control, the probability variation notification display unit 167 in the first pachinko gaming machine is not provided. Further, as will be described later, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the holding function for holding the start information of the normal symbol or the special symbol up to a predetermined number is not provided, so that the first pachinko gaming machine is used. Hold display unit 162 for ordinary symbols, hold display unit 165 for first special symbol, hold display unit 16 for second special symbol
6 is not provided either.

(Solenoid for general electricity)
The general electric solenoid 3148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electric shutter 3147. When the main CPU 201 energizes (turns on) the general electric solenoid 3148, the general electric shutter 3147 is advanced forward to open the second starting port 3140, and the main CPU 201 energizes the solenoid. If not (when it is OFF), the solenoid shutter 3147 is retracted rearward to close the second starting port 3140.

(Solenoid for special electric power)
The special electric solenoid 3135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special electric shutter 3134 including an opening / closing door. When the special electric solenoid 3135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the special electric shutter 3134 is tilted forward to open the large winning opening 3131, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized (OFF). ) And
The special electric shutter 3134 is inverted backward to close the large winning opening 3131.

(Solenoid for V attacker)
The solenoid for V-attacker 3154 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-attacker 3152. When the V-attacker solenoid 3154 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the V-attacker 3152 is retracted rearward to open and close the winning opening 3151.
When the main CPU 201 does not energize (when it is OFF), the V attacker 3152 is advanced forward to close the opening / closing winning opening 3151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 3159 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 3158. When the V-shutter solenoid 3159 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the V-shutter 3158 is retracted rearward to open the V winning opening 3155, and the main CPU 201 is not energized (ON). (When it is OFF),
The V shutter 3158 is advanced forward to close the V winning opening 3155. also,
In the present embodiment, the V shutter solenoid 3159 is operated 200 msec after the opening / closing winning opening 3151 is opened to open the V winning opening 3155. That is, V
The winning opening 3155 will be opened 200msec after the opening / closing winning opening 3151 is opened.

(1st start port switch)
The first start port switch 3121 is a penetration type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 3120. When the first start port switch 3121 detects the entry of the game ball into the first start port 3120, the main CPU 201 extracts the start information of the first special symbol, and the extracted special symbol start information is used as the first special symbol. It will be used for the hit determination process, the variable display process of the first special symbol will be performed, and the payout / launch control circuit 400 will be instructed to pay out the predetermined prize balls (for example, three game balls). ..

(2nd start port switch)
The second start port switch 3141 is a penetration type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 3140. When the second start port switch 3141 detects the entry of the game ball into the second start port 3140, the main CPU 201 extracts the start information of the second special symbol, and the extracted special symbol start information is used as the second special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, the variable display process of the second special symbol is performed, and the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is instructed to the payout / launch control circuit 400. ..

(1st passage gate switch)
The first passage gate switch 3127A is a penetration type proximity switch that detects the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A. When the first pass gate switch 3127A detects the passage of the game ball to the first pass gate 3126A, the main CPU 201 extracts the start information of the normal symbol and uses the extracted start information of the normal symbol for the hit determination process of the normal symbol. It will be used or a variable display process of a normal symbol will be performed.

(2nd passage gate switch)
The second passage gate switch 3127B is a penetration type proximity switch that detects the passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B. When the second pass gate switch 3127B detects the passage of the game ball to the second pass gate 3126B, the main CPU 201 extracts the start information of the normal symbol, and uses the extracted start information of the normal symbol for the hit determination process of the normal symbol. It will be used or a variable display process of a normal symbol will be performed.

When the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A, and when the second passage gate switch 3127B detects the passage of the game ball, the second passage gate 3
When the passage of the game ball to 126B is detected, the same normal symbol hit determination process is performed without distinction. Further, even if the passing of the game ball to the passing gates 3126A and 3126B is detected by the first passing gate switch 3127A or the second passing gate switch 3127B (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as “passing gate switches 3127A and 3127B”).
Prize balls will not be paid out.

(Large winning opening count switch)
The large winning opening count switch 3132 is a penetration type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 3131. When the large prize opening count switch 3132 detects the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 3131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entered per round and a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10). The payout process of the game ball) will be instructed to the payout / launch control circuit 400.

(V attacker count switch)
The V-attacker count switch 3153 is a penetration-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the open / close winning opening 3151. When the V-attacker count switch 3153 detects the entry of a game ball into the open / close winning opening 3151, the main CPU 201 adds the value of the V-attacker winning counter and pays out a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls). The process will be instructed to the payout / launch control circuit 400. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 3152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 3154 to close the opening / closing winning opening 3151 even if the maximum time for opening the opening / closing winning opening 3151 has not passed. Will be done.

(V winning opening switch)
The V winning opening switch 3156 is a penetration type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 3155. A predetermined time (for example, 4000 m) after the V attacker 3152 is opened.
When the V winning opening switch 3156 detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 3155 in sec), the main CPU 201 controls the transition to the big hit gaming state. Even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 3155 is detected by the V winning opening switch 3156, it should be noted.
Prize balls will not be paid out.

[5-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 120, the basic specifications of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, although the probability variation control is not executed.
The main CPU 201 is capable of advancing the game in a normal game state or a time-saving game state. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the probability change control is not executed, but this is not essential. For example, the probability change flag is set to ON according to the type of big hit and the like. May be feasible.

Further, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, although details will be described later, specific conditions (
The number of consecutive big hits that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state in (A time-saving gaming state) is counted, and when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number, the "limiter function" that partially regulates the gaming state that shifts after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is equipped with.

In the present embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the A time-shortened game state and the B time-shortened game state. Further, in the C time-saving game state, the game mode of left-handed and right-handed is appropriately changed depending on the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146. The sub CPU 301 executes a control for displaying, for example, a striking method, which is regarded as a normal game mode, in a display area of the display device 7.

[5-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 110 is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The hit determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 110 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In the special symbol hit determination table, "big hit" and "feature open hit" are used as data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 3120.
Alternatively, the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "time saving hit" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "feature opening hit judgment value data", "time saving hit judgment value" The relationship with "data") is stipulated. Further, as the data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting port 3140, "big hit" or "big hit" or "
The relationship between the range (width) of the random value for big hit judgment determined as "the winning of the character opening" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "the character opening hit judgment value data") is defined. Has been done. In both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the total random value of the jackpot determination random value is 65536. That is, the above-mentioned jackpot determination random value is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 110, when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120, the main CPU 2
01 is based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random value for the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "big hit", "feature open hit" or "hit". Decide on "time saving hit". Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 20
1 determines the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol as "big hit" or "feature open hit" based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random value for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. do.

It should be noted that the "loss" may be determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. Further, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, the "feature open hit" may not be determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an indispensable requirement that "big hit" or "time saving hit" is determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. However, other requirements are free to change the design as appropriate.

Further, it may be configured so that "loss" is determined when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but when it is determined to be "loss", the first special symbol is determined. It is preferable to set the probability to be relatively low so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process. Further, it may be configured so that the "time saving hit" is determined when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. That is, the fourth
In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine, it is an indispensable requirement that the "big hit" or the "opening hit" is determined when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. Other requirements are free to change the design as appropriate.

When the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability or / and the accessory opening hit probability are set higher in the high setting than in the low setting. It is good to set it to. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus opening hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus opening hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. May be. However, even if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all the settings.

Further, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and the accessory opening hit probability according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 3152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 3150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 3155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 3155, or the number of times of shortening of time may be changed for each set value. That is, the jackpot probability, the winning probability of opening the accessory, and the opening frequency of the V winning opening 3155 (that is, V).
Expected value controlled to the jackpot game state by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the operation frequency of the attacker 3152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening the time. May be configured so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[5-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111 is the first pachinko gaming machine of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
It is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the embodiment.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start opening 3120 and the second start opening 3140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when "selection symbol command" and "symbol specification command" are selected.

The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the "symbol specification command" is a special symbol. This is a command to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3. In this case, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 201 uses "z" as the selected symbol command.
Select "3" and select "zA1" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the hit determination value data of the accessory opening is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201
Selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol specification command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 89, the main C
PU201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "z" as the symbol specification command.
Select "A2". Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the accessory open hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111 can be used as the selected symbol command. , "Z6"<"z5"<"z4" in this order.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99. Select "z7" as the command and select "zA3" as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
Even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201
Selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the hit determination value data of the accessory opening is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CP.
U201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA" as the symbol designation command.
5 ”is selected.

Although the description is omitted in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main control circuit 200
In the main ROM 202 of the above, a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 109) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164, based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the display mode of the time reduction, the display mode of the big hit, and the display mode of the opening of the accessory are displayed. Alternatively, the display mode of loss is derived. Further, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[5-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 112 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112 is the main control circuit 2 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
It is stored in the main ROM 202 of 00. FIG. 112 (a) is an example of a hit type determination table referred to when the limiter function is not activated (when the limiter function is not activated), and FIG. 112 (b) is an example when the limiter function is activated (limiter). This is an example of the hit type determination table referred to when the function is activated.

As shown in FIG. 112, the hit type determination table has an opening mode for opening the accessory, a mode of the jackpot gaming state, and a mode of the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (time saving flag and time saving number of times) for the selected symbol command. ), The opening mode per opening of the accessory, and the number of limiters at the time of the first hit are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table, and based on the selection symbol command, the opening mode of the accessory opening, the jackpot gaming state mode, the gaming state mode after the jackpot gaming state (time reduction flag and time reduction number of times), and so on. The opening mode and the number of limiters per opening of the accessory are determined.

The "opening mode per opening of the accessory" is the opening / closing winning opening 31 that is opened at the time of "opening the accessory".
The opening mode of 51 (opening mode of the V winning device 3150) is shown. The "first opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening / closing winning opening 3151 has a short opening time (for example, 200 msec in this embodiment), which is disadvantageous to the player. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment,
Since the V winning opening 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening / closing winning opening 3151 is opened, the opening / closing winning opening 3151 is opened according to the first opening mode, and the game ball is opened / closed winning opening 315.
Even if the ball enters 1, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155, which is also a disadvantageous opening mode for the player. Further, the "second opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening / closing winning opening 3151 has a long opening time (for example, 18,000 msec), which is advantageous for the player. Then, when the opening / closing winning opening 3151 is opened by the second opening mode and the game ball enters the opening / closing winning opening 3151, it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155. It is an open mode that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the "first opening mode" has a short opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 3151, and the "second opening mode" has a long opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 3151. The opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 3151 is made substantially the same in the "opening mode" and the "second opening mode", and the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode". V winning opening 3
By opening the 155, the game ball may easily pass through the V winning opening 3155).

The "mode of the jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening mode of the jackpot 3131 that is opened at the time of the "big hit", and in the present embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot is shown. In addition to the number of rounds of big hits, the opening time per round and the big winning openings to be opened may be determined.

The "mode of the subsequent gaming state" indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and means the setting of the "time reduction flag" and the "time reduction number of times". When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving gaming state without being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the "time saving flag" and the "time saving number of times" are set.

The "number of limiters" indicates the number of limiters set at the time of a big hit in a state other than the A time saving game state (normal gaming state, B time saving gaming state, or C time saving gaming state). The number of limiters is subtracted each time the game shifts to the big hit game state under specific conditions (A time saving game state), and when the number of limiters = 0, the limiter function is activated and the hit type is determined as shown in FIG. 112 (b). The table will be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when the selection symbol commands "z4 to z6" corresponding to the "feature release hit" are obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 is set to "feature release". The "first open mode", which is disadvantageous to the player, is determined as the "win open mode".
When the selection symbol command "z9" corresponding to the "feature opening hit" is used as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, the "second opening mode" which is advantageous for the player as the "opening mode per bonus opening" is used. Is configured to determine.

In the present embodiment, as described above, either a "big hit" or a "feature opening hit" is determined in the hit determination process of the second special symbol. Then, when the "winning of the accessory opening" is determined as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, the "second opening mode" advantageous to the player is determined, and the game ball opens and closes the V in the winning opening 3151. It is easy to pass through the winning opening 3155, and it is easy to shift to the big hit game state from the second route. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is easy to shift to the jackpot gaming state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, which is substantially the same. It is configured to be able to shift to the big hit game state.

On the other hand, even if the "feature opening hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the "first opening mode" that is disadvantageous to the player is determined, and the jackpot from the second route is determined. It is difficult to shift to the gaming state. Therefore, the hit of opening the accessory triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated substantially in the same manner as the loss. note that,
The hit of opening the accessory triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated in the same manner as the loss, but is referred to in the switching of the fluctuation pattern table described later.

In the present embodiment, when the "winning of the character opening" is determined as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the "first opening mode of opening the character" is disadvantageous to the player. Although it is configured so that only the "opening mode" is determined, it may be configured so that the "second opening mode" which is advantageous to the player is determined. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the "second opening mode" that is advantageous to the player is less likely to be selected than the "first opening mode" that is disadvantageous to the player. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), when the selection symbol commands "z1 to z3" corresponding to "big hit" are the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 turns on the time saving flag. It is decided to set, and it is decided to set the number of time reductions to 100 times. Further, when the selected symbol command "z1" is used, the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, and determines that the number of limiters is set to 5 only in the case of a big hit in a state other than the A time saving game state. .. Further, when the selected symbol command "z2" is used, the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines that the number of limiters is set to 3 only in the case of a big hit in a state other than the A time saving game state. .. Further, when the selected symbol command "z3" is used, the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines that the number of limiters is set to 3 only in the case of a big hit in a state other than the A time saving game state. ..

As described above, in the case of "big hit" as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, a different number of rounds and a different number of limiters are set according to the selected symbol command.
As a result, the profit given to the player can be different for each type (design) of the jackpot.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), when the selection symbol command “z7” corresponding to “time saving hit” is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 20
1 determines to set the time reduction flag on and determines to set the number of time reductions to one.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the first
As a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the time-saving gaming state for an extremely short period is determined as compared with the "big hit".

The hit type determination table when the limiter function is activated shown in FIG. 112 (b) is shown in FIG. 112 (a).
Compared to the hit type determination table when the limiter function is not activated, the settings of "the mode of the subsequent game state" and "the number of limiters" are different, and the "open mode per opening of the accessory" and the "big hit game state" are different. The setting of "aspect" is the same. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), since the limiter function is operating, the "number of limiters" is not naturally set.

As shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Since there is no such thing, the time saving flag and the time saving number of times are set as in FIG. 112 (a).

However, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" or "feature open hit", either of the selected symbol commands is used. However, as a mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state, the time reduction flag is set to off, and the number of time reductions is not set. That is, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), the game state shifts to the normal game state as the game state after the end of the big hit game state.

[5-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIGS. 113 to 116 are examples of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 113 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in a normal gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 114 is a C time saving game in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of a state. Further, FIG. 115 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the A time-saving gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 116 is shown in FIG.
This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is the main RO of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
It is stored in M202.

As shown in FIGS. 113 to 116, the variation pattern table of the special symbol includes the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the reach determination random value, the effect selection random value, and the special. The fluctuation pattern of the symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are associated with each other. The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Further, the columns of "Remarks" in FIGS. 113 to 116 are shown for convenience for easy understanding.

The main CPU 201 determines a variation pattern table of any of the special symbols of FIGS. 113 to 116 according to the game state and the like, and refers to the determined variation pattern table of the special symbol.
The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for effect selection.

Further, when the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 3120, or a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port 3140. It is configured so that it can be identified.

The jackpot system reach and the jackpot system normal reach shown in the "Remarks" column of FIGS. 113 to 116 indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time saving hit). It is a reach production. The chance variation is a variation effect indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time saving hit.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, as the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern table T1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 113 (1) and FIG. 11
It is provided with three variation pattern tables, that is, the variation pattern table T2 of the special symbol shown in 3 (2) and the variation pattern table T3 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 113 (3). The number of variable pattern tables for special symbols in the normal gaming state is not limited to three, and may be one.
It may be 2 or more.

The variation pattern table T1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 113 (1) is "per opening of the accessory" after the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared (that is, the variation pattern table of the initial value). After the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is stopped and displayed, and after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated, the first special symbol hit determination process is performed. It is a variation pattern table selected after the end (that is, after the transition from the variation pattern table Z1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (1) described later).

The variation pattern table T2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 113 (2) is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command “z5” of the “feature opening” is stopped and displayed. ..

The variation pattern table T3 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 113 (3) is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command “z6” of the “feature opening” is stopped and displayed. ..

Fluctuation pattern tables T1 to special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to 113 (3).
In T3, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time reduction hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, the variation pattern "01H" (hereinafter, "01H").
Either the variation pattern "02H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance variation B"), which has a variable display time of a special symbol shorter than the variable display time of a normal symbol, is selected. To.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, but in the normal gaming state, the chance variation A, which is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is the second due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. The start port 3140 tends to be in an unfavorable opening mode, and the chance variation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is advantageous to the second start port 3140 due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. It tends to be an open mode.

Fluctuation pattern tables T1 to special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to 113 (3).
In T3, the selection rate between the chance fluctuation A and the chance fluctuation B is different. The chance variation B in which the second starting port 3140 tends to be an advantageous opening mode in the normal gaming state is easily selected in the order of the special symbol variation pattern table T1 <special symbol variation pattern table T2 <special symbol variation pattern table T3. Has been done.

Therefore, among the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbol in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern table T3 of the special symbol is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player, as described above in FIG. 111. In addition, as a selection symbol command,
Since it is configured so that it is easy to select in the order of "z6"<"z5"<"z4", the variation pattern table T3 of the special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is configured to be the most difficult to select.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in C time saving game state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, as the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the C time saving gaming state, the variation pattern table C1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 114 (1) and FIG. 1
It is provided with three variation pattern tables, that is, the variation pattern table C2 of the special symbol shown in 14 (2) and the variation pattern table C3 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 114 (3). In addition, C
The number of variable pattern tables of the special symbol in the time-saving game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The variation pattern table C1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 114 (1) is the first special after the transition from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state or in response to the selection symbol command "z4" of "per opening of the character". It is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected after the symbol is stopped and displayed.

The variation pattern table C2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 114 (2) is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" of "per opening of the accessory" is stopped and displayed. ..

The variation pattern table C3 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 114 (3) is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" of "per opening of the accessory" is stopped and displayed. ..

Fluctuation pattern table C1 of the special symbol of the C time saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 114 (1) to 114 (3).
Also in C3, the variation pattern table T1 of the special symbol in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 113
Similar to T3, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol "chance fluctuation A" and the special symbol. One of the fluctuation patterns of "chance fluctuation B" whose variable display time is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is selected.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 138, but even in the C time-shortening gaming state, the chance variation A, which is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. The second starting port 3140 tends to be in an unfavorable opening mode, and the chance variation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is the second starting port 3140 due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. Is likely to be an advantageous opening mode.

Fluctuation pattern table C1 of the special symbol of the C time saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 114 (1) to 114 (3).
In C3, the selection rates of the chance fluctuation A and the chance fluctuation B are different. Chance variation B, in which the second starting port 3140 tends to be an advantageous opening mode in the C time-saving gaming state, is likely to be selected in the order of special symbol variation pattern table C1 <special symbol variation pattern table C2 <special symbol variation pattern table C3. It is configured.

Therefore, among the variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the special symbol in the C time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern table C3 of the special symbol is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player, and is described above in FIG. 111. As described above, since the selected symbol command is configured so that it can be easily selected in the order of "z6"<"z5"<"z4", the special symbol variation pattern table C3 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is the most. It is difficult to select.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbol in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 113,
The variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the special symbol in the C time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 114 are the first.
The variation pattern of the special symbol is common, but the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit for opening the accessory". That is,
In the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbol in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 113, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit for opening the accessory", the main CPU 201 changes the second special symbol. Pattern, variable time, for example 500000 msec or 600
It has been decided to produce an extremely long fluctuation of 000 msec. This is because, in the normal gaming state, the game ball basically does not win (pass) the second starting port 3140, but an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball should be in the second starting port 3140. This is done in order to minimize the benefits that can be given to the advantager even if the player wins a prize, but it is not always necessary to do so.

Therefore, the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbol in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 113
And, the variation pattern table of the special symbol common to the variation pattern table C1 to C3 of the special symbol of the C time saving game state shown in FIG. 114 may be adopted.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in A time saving game state or B time saving game state)
The variation pattern table A of the special symbol shown in FIG. 115 is a variation pattern table selected when controlled to the A time saving gaming state or the B time saving gaming state.

The variable display time of the special symbol is configured to be relatively short in the variable pattern table A of the special symbol, except when the result of the hit determination process is “big hit”. As a result, in the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state, the game ball opens and closes the V winning opening 3155 in the winning opening 3151.
It is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route by passing through in a short time.

(Variation pattern table of special symbol after the limiter function is activated)
The variation pattern table Z1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (1) is a specific variation pattern table selected in the first hit determination process of the special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. be.

In the variation pattern table Z1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (1), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the second starting port 31 is in the normal gaming state.
It is configured so that the chance variation B, in which 40 tends to be an advantageous opening mode, is always selected.

When the chance variation B is selected in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous opening mode, and the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 3140. Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the game ball easily shifts to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball becomes the second. By entering the starting port 3140, it is possible to substantially shift to the big hit game state.

Therefore, even if the consecutive villas in the time-saving game state are terminated by the operation of the limiter function, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state is "time-saving hit", it will be repeated. Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the operation of the limiter function.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern table Z1 of the special symbol is configured so that the chance variation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit". The chance variation A, in which the second starting port 3140 tends to have an unfavorable opening mode, may be selected with a lower probability than the chance variation B.

It should be noted that, after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated and after the first hit determination process of the first special symbol is completed, the variation pattern table Z1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (1) is completed. Therefore, the variation pattern table T1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 113 (1) is selected.

The variation pattern table Z2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (2) is a modification of the variation pattern table Z1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (1), and after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. It is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. In the variation pattern table Z2 of the special symbol, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the chance variation A is 20% and the chance variation B is.
Is configured to be selected with a probability of 80%.

Even in this way, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" after the transition to the normal gaming state, the probability of shifting to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the operation of the limiter function.

The variation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 of the special symbol are the variation pattern tables selected based on the first hit determination process of the special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. Not limited to the first time, for example, when it has a special symbol holding function, it may be a variable pattern table selected based on the hit determination process of the special symbol up to the fourth time, or up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times. It may be a variation pattern table selected based on the hit determination process of the special symbol of.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the chance variation A and the chance variation B are set to one, but it is special based on the variable display time of the normal symbol. The variable display time of the symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. May be good.

[5-3-5. Ordinary symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 117 is an example of a hit determination table of a normal symbol in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The hit determination table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 117 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The hit judgment table of the normal symbol is a table referred to in the hit judgment process of the normal symbol, that is, the game state and the random value for hit judgment of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. It is a table referred to when determining "normal symbol hit" or "loss" by lottery based on.

In the hit judgment table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 117, the game state, the range (width) of the random value for the normal symbol hit judgment, and the normal symbol hit judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”)
Is associated with and specified.

As described above, the hit determination random value of the ordinary symbol is a random value used in the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a hit determination random value of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 117, and determines the normal symbol hit determination value data based on the game state and the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random value value.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that if the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 89, it determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is used. Determined as "ordinary symbol hit judgment value data". Further, in the non-time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 90 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the A time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that if the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 98, it determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". It is decided to be "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the A time saving game state, when the hit determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 determines “missing” and determines the determination value data as “missing determination value data”.

Further, in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that if the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 89, it determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". It is decided to be "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 90 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

Further, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that if the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value is any of 0 to 89, it determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and the winning determination value data is "normal". It is decided to be "design hit judgment value data". Further, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the random value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is any of 90 to 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data". To decide.

As described above, in the present embodiment, among the normal game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time reduction game state (FIG. 117).
The selectivity (approximate) shown in is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-shortening gaming state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the normal game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

The winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, and the C time reduction game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to make the ratio of the types of ordinary symbols, which will be described later, different for each state without changing the winning probability per ordinary symbol.

[5-3-6. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 118 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118 is the first pachinko gaming machine of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
It is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the embodiment.

The normal symbol judgment table includes the above-mentioned winning judgment value data and the passing gates 3126A and 312.
In the table referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through 6B. be. The "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the normal symbol hit symbol determined according to the normal symbol hit type when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be.

In the normal symbol judgment table shown in FIG. 118, the normal symbol hit judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “missing”), the normal symbol symbol random value, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command are associated with each other. It is regulated. The symbol random value of the normal symbol is, for example, 0 to 9.
Extracted from 9 (100 types).

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, and determines the normal symbol hit selection symbol command based on the normal symbol hit determination value data and the normal symbol symbol random value.

According to the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, when the ordinary symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the ordinary symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. To.

For example, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 uses the normal symbol hit selection symbol command if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 29. Select "fz1" as the value, and the symbol random value of the normal symbol is 30 to 6.
If it is any of 9, select "fz2" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is any of 70 to 99, select "fz3" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. select.

In particular, in the present embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command", the winning determination value data (normal symbol hit determination processing) is selected regardless of the gaming state. It is configured to be selected based on the result of) and the symbol random value of the normal symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 first determines the winning determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value by referring to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 117). After that, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random value of the normal symbol, the winning of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of hitting the normal symbol may be determined together.

[5-3-7. Ordinary symbol per type determination table]
FIG. 119 is an example of a type determination table for a normal symbol in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The type determination table for each normal symbol shown in FIG. 119 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit type determination table is a normal electric combination as an opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 according to the game state and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the object 3146.

In the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 119, a gaming state, a normal symbol hit selection symbol command, and an opening pattern as an opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the type determination table per ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 119, and refers to the table.
The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is determined based on the game state and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. After that, the main CPU 201 is the determined ordinary electric accessory 3146.
The opening pattern command of the ordinary electric accessory corresponding to the opening pattern of is transmitted to the sub CPU 301.

In the present embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state, the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is any of the normal symbol hit time selection symbol commands as long as it is the normal symbol hit time selection symbol command. The opening pattern is the first opening time of 200 msec,
It is decided that there is no wait time and no second opening.

In the normal gaming state, the first opening time may be different depending on the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. For example, in the normal gaming state, if the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, is set to the first opening time of 200 msec, and the normal symbol hits. The time selection symbol command is "f"
When it is "z2", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is set to the first opening time of 250 msec, and when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is opened. The opening pattern, which is an embodiment, may be set to the first opening time of 300 msec, and the second opening time may be set to 0 in any of the normal symbol hit time selection symbol commands.

Further, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time saving game state and the normal symbol hit time selection symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 2000 msec. , Wait time 200 msec, second opening time 2000 msec. Further, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time saving game state and the normal symbol hit time selection symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 2500 msec. , Wait time 20
It is determined that the opening time is 0 msec and the second opening time is 2500 msec. Also, the main CPU 20
In the case of the A time-shortening gaming state, if the normal symbol hit time selection symbol command is "fz3", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, is set to the first opening time 300.
It is determined to have 0 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 3000 msec.

Further, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time saving game state or the C time saving gaming state and the normal symbol hit time selection symbol command is "fz1", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is set to 1. It is determined that the second opening time is 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. Further, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time saving game state or the C time saving gaming state and the normal symbol hit time selection symbol command is "fz2", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is set to 1. The opening time of the second time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the opening time of the second time is 2000 msec. Further, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time saving game state or the C time saving gaming state and the normal symbol hit time selection symbol command is "fz3", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is set to 1. The opening time of the second time is 2500 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the opening time of the second time is 2500 msec.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the same normal symbol hit selection symbol command (for example, "fz")
Even if it is 1 ”), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is configured to be different depending on the gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in each gaming state. Among the patterns, the most advantageous degree is the disadvantageous aspect. The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting port 3140 when the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is opened.

A When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the most advantageous among the opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in each gaming state. The degree is an advantageous embodiment.

Further, in the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the C time saving game state is ". The degree of advantage is the same as that of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the case of "per ordinary symbol", but the present invention is not limited to this.

[5-3-8. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 120 is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 120 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The variation pattern table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 120 shows the game state and the passing gate 3126.
The random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through A and 3126B, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol are associated with each other. It should be noted that the random value for selecting a normal symbol effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the normal symbol, and changes the normal symbol based on the game state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. Determine the variable display time of the pattern and the normal symbol. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol to the sub CPU 301.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the normal game state or the C time saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10000 regardless of whether the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99.
Determined to be msec.

Further, in the A time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 90 to 99. If it is one of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 800 mse.
Determined to c.

Further, in the B time saving game state, when the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 40 to 79. In the case of any of, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 1000 ms.
When it is determined by ec and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

As described above, as for the variable display time of the normal symbol per one variable display, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the A time-shortening gaming state is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal symbol in each gaming state. Therefore, the A time saving game state is the normal electric accessory 314 in each game state.
The time until 6 is released is the shortest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol is fixed to 10000 msec in the normal game state and the C time reduction game state. Therefore, FIGS. 113 to 1
In the variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in 15, as described above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the chance variation A longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is The variable display time is 13000 msec, which is longer than 10000 msec, and the chance variation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is the variable display time of 9000 msec, which is shorter than 10000 msec. For details, see FIGS. 137 and 138.
As will be described later using the above, from the relationship between the gaming state, the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol, the normal electric accessory 3146 opening pattern (second) as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146. The opening mode of the starting port 3140) will change.

[5-4. Main control process]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 20 of the main control circuit 200
The various processes (various modules) executed by 1 are the main control main processes (FIGS. 20 to 23).
Although the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the switch input detection process performed in S39 in (see) are partially different, the other processes are the same. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the switch input detection process will be described, and the main CPU will be described.
The description of other processing executed by 201 will be omitted.

The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example,).
The jackpot end processing (FIG. 42, FIG. 133), etc.), and the following, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, will be described again with different step numbers.

[5-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process according to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S3001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU
201 transfers the processing to S3002 after executing the processing of S3001.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 is used to execute the special symbol control process.
Prior to the processing of S3001, the address setting processing for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 to a predetermined register is performed.

In S3002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S3001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (S3002 is N).
(In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S300).
(2 is a YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start.

When it is determined in S3003 that the second special symbol is not the start of variable display (S3003).
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3004.

In S3004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start.

When it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol is not the start of variable display (S3004).
Is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol is the start of variable display (S3).
(When 004 is a YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3005.

Returning to S3003, when it is determined that the second special symbol has started variable display (S300).
3), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3005.

In S3005, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122. The main CPU 201 is S3
After executing the process of 003, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process is the main control main process (FIG. 2).
Return to 0 to (see FIG. 23).

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S).
It is preferable to perform 3001 to S3005) within the interrupt disabled section.

[5-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121) will be described. FIG. 122 shows the fourth
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in 1st Embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine.

When the control status number is 0 (when S3002 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S3003 is YES determination, and S3004 is YE.
In the case of S determination, the first special symbol is the processing target. If the control status number is not 0 (S)
(When the determination in 3002 is NO), the special symbol being executed is the processing target in the special symbol management process.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 122 are shown in parentheses.
This is the control status number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S3).
011).

When it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (S3011 is N).
(In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S301).
(1 is a YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3012.

In S3012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
Then, after executing the process of S3012, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3013. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S3013 based on the control state number read out in the processing of S3012.

In S3013, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S3013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 performs processing S3014.
Move to.

In S3014, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S3014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. If the control status number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 performs processing S3015.
Move to.

In S3015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S3
The process of 015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3016.

In S3016, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This S
The process of 3016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3".
The details of the V-winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3017.

In S3017, the main CPU 201 performs the V winning device opening control process. This S
The process of 3017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4".
The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3018.

In S3018, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. This S3
The process of 018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3019.

In S3019, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. This S3
The process of 019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this large winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3020.

In S3020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This S3020
The process of is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

After completing the processes of S3013 to S3020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

[5-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the special symbol variable display start processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S3013 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 123
Is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

If the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S3013 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly,
S30 in the special symbol management process in which the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol
In the case of the process called in 13, the second special symbol is the process target.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S3021).

When it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S30).
21 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (
(When the determination in S3021 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3022.

In S3022, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 110) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random value stored in the special symbol determination area. Will be. In the present embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a bonus opening hit, or a time saving hit. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a bonus opening hit. Main CPU 20
1 transfers the process to S3023 after executing the process of S3022.

In S3023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is
This is a process for determining or determining a stop symbol of a special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) (for example, a big hit, an accessory opening hit, and a time saving hit). In this process
The above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 111) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area. After executing the process of S3023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit (big hit, accessory opening hit, and time saving hit). In this process, the hit type is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S3023) with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 112). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, the hit of the bonus is that the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155 opened based on the hit of the bonus. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpot and bonus opening, but there may be only one type of jackpot and / or bonus opening. Furthermore, there may be a plurality of types of time saving hits. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S3024, the process is transferred to S3025.

In S3025, the main CPU 201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process
The variation pattern table of any of the special symbols of FIGS. 113 to 116 is determined according to the game state, etc., and the variation pattern table of the determined special symbol is referred to, and the type of the special symbol and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol are performed. , And the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value. The details of the variation pattern determination process of this special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3026.

In S3026, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the determined variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 113 to 116) determined in the variation pattern determination process (S3025) of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start the variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process of S3026, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3027.

In S3027, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving management process. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the ceiling counter update process for adding 1 to the ceiling counter and the time reduction counter are used. The time saving counter update process for subtracting 1 is performed. Specifically, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the specified number of times is set in the time saving number counter to identify the B time saving gaming state. The number = 2 is set, and the transition control to the B time saving game state is performed. Further, when the time reduction counter = 0, the time reduction flag and the time reduction identification number are cleared, and the transition control from the time reduction gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed.

Further, since the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine referred to as the first-class and two-kind mixing machine is not controlled to the highly accurate gaming state, the time saving management executed in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is performed. The processing is also different from the processing described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set on when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine of No. 4, the high accuracy gaming state is not controlled. Therefore, when the probability variation flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on instead of setting it to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Is different. Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is off (see S191), and the condition is that the probability change flag is off. Although the processing of S192 is performed, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, since it is not controlled to the high accuracy gaming state as described above, it differs in that the processing of S192 is performed without the processing of S191. .. Then, also in the time saving transition processing (see FIG. 38), the transition control to the B time saving gaming state is controlled by the ceiling flag turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value without performing the processing of S202 (see S208). Will be done. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S3027, the main CPU 201 performs the process S.
Move to 3028.

In S3028, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, after the end of the special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (
(See S3014 in FIG. 122) will be performed. The main CPU 201 is S3028.
After executing the process of, the process is transferred to S3029.

In S3029, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a parameter related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining time reductions) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is updated. Main CPU 2
01 transfers the process to S3030 after executing the process of S3029.

In S3030, the main CPU 201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the time saving flag and the like) are mainly updated. After executing the process of S3030, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3031.

In S3031, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-disabled section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S3030), transmission reservation process of special symbol effect start command (S3031)) in the interrupt-disabled section. It is preferable to do it in-house.

[5-4-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, S302 during the special symbol variable display start processing (see FIG. 123).
The details of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol executed by the main CPU 201 in FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the limiter operation flag is on (S).
3025-1). In S3025-1, when it is determined that the limiter operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3025-2, and when it is determined that the limiter operation flag is not on, the process is performed in S3025-. Move to 5.

Here, the "limiter operation flag" is a flag that counts the number of consecutive big hits that have transitioned to the big hit gaming state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state), and is activated when the number of consecutive big hits reaches a predetermined number of limiters. , It is turned on in the limiter number update process (see FIG. 127) described later.

In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter = 0. In S3025-2, when it is determined that the ceiling counter = 0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3025-3, and when it is determined that the ceiling counter is not 0, the process shifts to S3025-5. Move.

Unlike the first pachinko machine, the "ceiling counter" updates the ceiling counter (adds 1) when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and B when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value.
It is a counter for controlling the time-saving game state. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is performed, the ceiling counter is not yet added in the “time saving management process” of S3027, so that the ceiling counter = 0. The case where is means the time when the first variable display of the special symbol in the normal gaming state is started.

In S3025-3, the main CPU 201 turns off the limiter operation flag and sets it.
The process is transferred to S3025-4.

In S3025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern table Z1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (1) as a specific variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated. As shown in the modified example, the variation pattern table Z2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (2) may be determined.

Further, in S3025-4, the small hit symbol switching information = 0, which will be described later, is set, and from the next time onward, from the variation pattern table Z1 or Z2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116, FIG. 113
Preparations are made so that the variation pattern table T1 of the special symbol shown in (1) is selected.

In S3025-5, the current gaming state of the main CPU 201 is the normal gaming state.
In order to grasp which of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state is controlled, the information of the game state (time-saving identification number) is acquired.

In S3025-6, when the main CPU 201 is previously determined to be a "feature open hit" as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the information of the symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 163. (Hereinafter referred to as "small hit symbol switching information") is acquired.

The "small hit symbol switching information" is an overwrite process of the small hit symbol switching information described later (S of FIG. 126).
(See 3062), one piece of information is overwritten and updated. When it is determined as "a hit for opening a character" as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selected symbol command "
When the first special symbol corresponding to "z4" is stopped and displayed, the small hit symbol switching information = 0 is stored, and the small hit symbol switching information = 0 is stored.
When the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" is stopped and displayed, the small hit symbol switching information = 1 is stored, and when the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is stopped and displayed. , Small hit symbol switching information = 2 will be stored.

In S3025-7, the main CPU 201 determines one variation pattern table from a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the acquired game state information and the small hit symbol switching information.

Specifically, when it is determined that the main CPU 201 is controlled to the normal gaming state, the small hit symbol switching information = 0 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is determined in FIG. 113 (1).
When the variation pattern table T1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. , When the small hit symbol switching information = 2 corresponding to the selected symbol command “z6”, the variation pattern table T3 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 113 (3) is determined.

Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the C time shortening gaming state is controlled, the main CPU 201 is determined to be in the C time saving game state.
When the small hit symbol switching information = 0 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4", the variation pattern table C1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 114 (1) is determined, and the small hit symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" is determined. When the switching information = 1, the variation pattern table C2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 114 (2) is determined, and when the small hit symbol switching information = 2 according to the selected symbol command “z6” is determined.
The variation pattern table C3 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 114 (3) is determined.

Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the control is controlled to the A time saving game state or the B time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern table A of the special symbol shown in FIG. 115 regardless of the small hit symbol switching information. do.

In S3025-8, the main CPU 201 acquires the type of the special symbol and the winning information (big hit, opening hit of the accessory, and time saving hit) as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In S3025-9, the main CPU 201 acquires the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value from the special symbol determination area.

In S3025-10, the main CPU 201 is the above S3025-4 or the above S.
With reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in 3025-7, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type of special symbol, the winning information, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for effect selection. ..

[5-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 125
Is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S3014 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S3014 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the process target, the second special symbol is the process target.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S3041).

When it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S30).
(When 41 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process.
The process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (
(When the determination in S3041 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3042.

In S3042, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, after the end of the special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S3 in FIG. 122).
015) will be performed. After executing the process of S3042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3043.

In S3043, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3043, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3044.

In S3044, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter.
As described above in the description of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of executions of the special symbol game). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining time reductions. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-6. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 126 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine.

If this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S3015 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly,
S3015 in the special symbol management process in which the special symbol game determination process targets the second special symbol
When called with, the second special symbol is the processing target.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S3051).

When it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S30).
(When 51 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (
(When the determination in S3051 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3052.

In S3052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S3052, when it is determined that the special symbol that is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S3052 is NO), the main CPU 201 is determined.
The process is transferred to S3061. On the other hand, in S3052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S3052 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the opening hit of the accessory, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the loss, NO is determined in S3052.

In S3053, the main CPU 201 subtracts the number of limiters each time the game shifts to the jackpot game state in the A time-saving game state, and performs the limiter number update process of whether or not to activate the limiter function. The limiter number update process in S3053 is a process that is updated when the first route shifts to the jackpot gaming state. As will be described later, when the game shifts from the second route to the big hit game state, the V winning device opening control process (FIG. 130).
(See), the number of limiters will be updated (see S3096). Further, the details of the limiter number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. Main CPU 201
After executing the process of S3053, transfers the process to S3054.

In S3054, the main CPU 201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control.
In this process, the hall computer 186 (both are shown in FIG. 109) via the external terminal board 184.
The signal output to (see) (eg, jackpot signal, etc.) is generated and updated. note that,
The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S3054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3055.

Further, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S3054, the main CPU 201 is
It also performs processing to clear various flags and counters such as time saving flags and time saving counters.

In S3055, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201, for example, performs a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 3131 is opened (S3056), and a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal board 184 (S).
3057), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), a game state specification parameter setting process (S3059), a process of reserving the transmission of the jackpot start display command (S3060), and the like. By performing the process (S3058) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, main C
The PU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a bonus opening hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a bonus opening hit.

In S3061, when it is determined in S3061 that the special symbol that has stopped, that is, the special symbol that has stopped is a stop display mode indicating a time saving hit or a loss (when the determination in S3061 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3071. On the other hand, in S3061, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the accessory opening hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit (when the determination in S3061 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the process in S3062. Move.

In S3062, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected symbol command when it is determined as "a hit of the accessory open" as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and when the selected symbol command "z4" is used, the small hit symbol is used. The switching information is updated by overwriting "0", and when the selected symbol command "z5" is used, the small hit symbol switching information is updated by overwriting "1", and when the selected symbol command "z6" is used, the small hit symbol is updated. Overwrite "2" in the switching information and update. When it is determined as "a hit for opening the accessory" as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the process is transferred to S3063 without overwriting the small hit symbol switching information. After executing the process of S3062, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3063.

In S3063, the main CPU 201 performs the start setting process of the game control per opening of the accessory. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per opening of the accessory) output to the hall computer 186 (both refer to FIG. 109) is generated and updated via the external terminal board 184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S3063, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3064.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value of the number of times the V winning device 3150 is opened. In the present embodiment, the V winning device 3150 set in this process
The upper limit of the number of times of opening is, for example, once. After executing the process of S3064, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3065.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs a signal setting process (S3065) for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 184, and a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S30).
66), game state designation parameter setting processing (S3067), transmission reservation processing (S3068) of a bonus opening hit start display command, and the like are performed. By performing the process (S3066) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S3016 in FIG. 122) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3069, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a time saving opening hit.

If it is determined in S3069 that it is not a time saving hit, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3061 that the time is reduced, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3070.

In S3070, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112, determines the mode of the game state (time reduction flag and time reduction number of times) based on the selection symbol command “z7” for the time reduction, and determines the game. Set the data of the mode of the state. Specifically, the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), the time saving number counter = 1 is set, and the time saving identification number = 3 for identifying the C time saving gaming state is set. note that,
As for the time saving identification number, when the state shifts to the time saving game state, the time saving identification number = 1 is set, and B
When the game shifts to the time saving game state, the time saving identification number = 2 is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hit type determination table is 2 depending on whether or not the limiter function is activated.
There are two hit type determination tables, but for time-saving hits, the hit type determination table when the limiter function is not activated is referred to regardless of whether the limiter function is activated or not. Main CPU
201 transfers the processing to S3071 after executing the processing of S3070.

In S3071, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. The main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is terminated and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S3051 to S3071) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[5-4-7. Limiter count update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the details of the limiter number update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3053 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the limiter number update process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the A time saving game state (S3053-.
1). In S3053-1, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3053-2 when it is determined that it is in the A time saving game state, and shifts the process to S3053-5 when it is determined that it is not in the A time saving gaming state. Move.

In S3053-2, the main CPU 201 is updated by subtracting 1 from the number of limiters. The main CPU 201 executes the process of S3053-2, and then performs the process in S3053-.
Move to 3.

In S3053-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of limiters = 0. When it is determined that the limiter count = 0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3053-4, and when it is determined that the limiter count is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter count update process and specializes the process. Return to the symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

Here, when it is determined that the number of limiters = 0, it means that the number of transitions to the jackpot gaming state has reached the number of limiters in the A time-saving gaming state.

In S3053-4, the main CPU 201 turns on the limiter operation flag.
After executing the process of S3053-4, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

In S3053-5, the main CPU 201 performs the setting process of the number of limiters at the time of the first hit. The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table when the limiter function is not activated shown in FIG. 112A, determines the number of limiters based on the selected symbol command, and sets the determined number of limiters. After executing the process of S3053-5, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-8. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3071 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 128
Is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S30).
72). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is completed, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S3072, the main CPU 201
The process is transferred to S3073.

In S3073, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. It also clears various random numbers stored in the special symbol determination area. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S3074) of the special symbol game end command.
The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S3074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-9. V prize device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S3081).

When it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S30).
(When 81 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (
(When the determination in S3081 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3082.

In S3082, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112, and determines the opening mode per opening of the accessory as the opening pattern of the V winning device 3150.
The determined opening mode (for example, maximum opening time and maximum number of opening times) is set. In the present embodiment, when the "first opening mode" is disadvantageous to the player, the maximum is 200 msec.
"Second opening mode" that is advantageous for the player by setting the opening pattern to open only once.
When is, it is set to an opening pattern in which opening of a maximum of 1800 msec is performed only once. The opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, when the "second opening mode" is advantageous for the player, the opening of a maximum of 900 msec may be performed a maximum of two times, for example, the first time. Open up to 600msec and open the second time, for example, up to 1200msec
You may try to open it. Furthermore, the total specified time (for each opening of the accessory)
For example, a plurality of open patterns may be provided within a range not exceeding (1800 msec), and one of the plurality of open patterns may be set to one of the open patterns based on, for example, a symbol random value of a special symbol.

Further, in S3082, the main CPU 201 opens and closes the V winning opening 3155.
The operating mode of the shutter 3158 is determined, and the determined operating mode (for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of times of opening) is set. In this embodiment, 2 from the opening of the V winning device 3150.
After 00 msec, the operation mode for opening the V winning opening 3155 is set. Main C
After executing the process of S3082, the PU 201 shifts the process to S3083.

In S3083, the main CPU 201 performs the V winning device open / close control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the V winning opening 3155 is performed. Main CPU 201
After executing the process of S3083, transfers the process to S3084.

In S3084, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S3084).
After the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (
(See S3017 in FIG. 122) will be performed. The main CPU 201 is S3084
After executing the process of, the process is transferred to S3085.

In S3085, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3085, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3086.

In S3086, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the V winning device opening display command. The V-winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is used in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S3086, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-10. V winning device open control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S3091).

When it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S30).
(When 91 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (
(When the determination in S3091 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3092.

In S3092, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 when the opening / closing winning opening 3151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 (see FIG. 109), which counts the number of winnings of the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 3150, is the value of the maximum number of winnings. To. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S3092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 3150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S3092), the main CPU 201 performs the process.
Move to 3093.

On the other hand, in S3092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 3150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S3092 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3094.

In S3093, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 3151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S3082 (see FIG. 129) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has not elapsed (NO in S3093), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and performs the process as a special symbol management process (when it is determined). (See FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has elapsed (when the determination in S3093 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the process in S3094.
Move to.

In S3094, the main CPU 201 closes the V winning device 3150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 3151). After executing the process of S3094, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3095.

In S3095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 3155 (that is, whether or not it has been detected by the V winning opening switch 3156) within the specified time. The above-mentioned specified time may be any time as long as it is related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V-winning device 3150. can do.

When it is determined in S3095 that the V winning detection has been made (when the determination in S3095 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3096.

In S3096, similarly to the above S3053, the main CPU 201 subtracts the number of limiters each time the game shifts to the big hit game state in the A time saving game state, and performs the limiter number update process of whether or not to activate the limiter function. The limiter number update process in S3096 is a process that is updated when the second route shifts to the jackpot gaming state.
After executing the process of S3096, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3097.

In S3097, the main CPU 201 performs a game control start setting process per V.
In this process, the hall computer 186 (both are shown in FIG. 109) via the external terminal board 184.
The signal output to (see) is generated and updated (for example, a signal per V). note that,
The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the game control per V is executed, for example, a round game of 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 112), so that the player can perform the big hit game control process. You can win as many prize balls as if they were executed. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-per game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and referred to, but the V-per game control may also be referred to as the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S3097, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3098.

Further, in the start setting process of the game control per V of S3097, the main CPU 201 is
It also performs processing to clear various flags and counters such as time saving flags and time saving counters.

In S3098, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 3150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 3152) that is first executed based on the winning of the winning combination is processed as the first round game. That is, it was determined that the V prize was detected (S3095 is YE).
The game control per V executed by (S determination) is started from the second round game. After executing the process of S3098, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3099.

In S3099, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 is, for example, the number of times the V winning device 3150 is opened (
That is. Processing to set the upper limit value (number of operations of V attacker 3152) (S3100)
, V hit signal set processing to the external terminal board 184 (S3101), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), game state specification parameter setting processing (S310).
3), and processing such as transmission reservation processing (S3104) of the start display command per V is performed.
By performing the process (S3102) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S301 in FIG. 122)
8) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3095, when it is determined that there is no V winning detection in this S3095 (when the determination in S3095 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3105.

In S3105, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 128 is performed. Main CPU 20
After executing the process of S3105, 1 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-11. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 131 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S3111).

When it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S31).
(When 11 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (
(When the determination in S3111 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3112.

In S3112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is the main R.
It is stored in a predetermined area in AM203. After executing the process of S3112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3113.

In S3113, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S3113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit (S3113).
Is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3114.

In S3114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S3114).
By performing the above, the big hit end processing (see S3020 in FIG. 122) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process. After executing the process of S3114, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3115.

In S3115, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S3).
116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S3116, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3113, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit (S311)
3), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3117.

In S3117, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S3117, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3118.

In S3118, the main CPU 201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big winning opening 3131 is selected as the big winning opening that opens to the big hit gaming state.
If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game control process is started by deriving the stop display mode indicating the big hit, the big prize opening 3131 is used as the big winning opening. The result of the hit judgment processing of the special symbol selected is the hit of the accessory opening,
In the case of the game control per V that is started by the derivation of the stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory and the detection of the V winning, the opening is not the big winning opening 3131 but the big winning opening 3131.
The V winning device 3150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 3151) may be selected. Main CPU 2
01 transfers the process to S3119 after executing the process of S3118.

In S3119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 3131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 3131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 3131, the number of winning balls at the time of winning the large winning opening 3131, and the like are set. .. The number of rounds is equivalent to the number of times the large winning opening 3131 is opened. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the large winning opening 3131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case,
It is preferable to perform control for managing the number of rounds and control for managing the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 3131 as separate processes. After executing the process of S3119, the main CPU 201
The process is transferred to S3120.

In S3120, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 3131 or the V winning device 3150 is performed. After executing the process of S3120, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3121.

In S3121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S3121).
By performing the above, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (FIG. 1)
22 S3019) will be performed. After executing the process of S3121, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3122.

In S3122, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3123.

In S3123, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3123, the main CPU 201
The large winning opening opening preparation process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-12. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 132 shows
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in 1st Embodiment of 4th pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S3131).

When it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (S31).
(When 31 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (
(When the determination in S3131 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3132.

In S3132, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 3131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the large winning opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109) for counting the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 3131 is the value of the maximum winning number. The value of the large winning opening counter counted by the large winning opening count switch 3132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S3132, when it is determined that the number of game balls entered in the large winning opening 3131 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S3132 is NO), the main CPU 201 processes the process in S3.
Move to 133.

On the other hand, in S3132, when it is determined that the number of game balls entered in the large winning opening 3131 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S3132 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3134.

In S3133, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 3131 has elapsed. In this process, various setting processes related to the large winning opening (S311 in FIG. 131)
It is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in 9) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 3131 has not elapsed (when the determination in S3133 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process as a special symbol management process (when it is determined). (See FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 3131 has elapsed (when the determination in S3133 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3134.

In S3134, the main CPU 201 closes the large winning opening 3131. After executing the process of S3134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3135.

In S3135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control status number of the special symbol to "5" (S)
By performing 3135), the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed again after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process. After executing the process of S3135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3136.

In S3136, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3137.

In S3137, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S3137, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-13. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S3141).

When it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (S31)
(When 41 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

When it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S31).
(When 41 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3142.

In S3142, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags are set and values of various counters (for example, a ceiling counter, a round counter, a large winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing the process of S3142, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3143.

In S3143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the end of the big hit. In this post-big hit state setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the on / off of the limiter operation flag, and if the limiter operation flag is off, determines the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112 (a), and the limiter. If the operation flag is on, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112 (b) is determined. Then, with reference to the determined hit type determination table, the mode of the gaming state (time reduction flag and number of time reductions) after the big hit gaming state is determined, and the data of the determined gaming state mode is set. Specifically, when the limiter operation flag is off, the time saving flag = 1 is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter = 100 is set to identify that the game is in the A time saving game state. The time saving identification number = 1 is also set. If the limiter operation flag is on, the time saving flag = 0 is set (the time saving flag is turned off).
At the same time, the time reduction counter = 0 and the time reduction identification number = 0 are set. Main CPU 2
After executing the process of S3143, 01 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[5-4-14. Ordinary symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. In addition, FIG. 134
Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in the above, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 134 are control state numbers of ordinary symbols. Main C
The PU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 134 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S3).
291).

When it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time of a normal symbol is not 0 (S3291 is N).
(In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and shifts the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S329).
(1 is a YES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3292.

In S3292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process of S3292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3293. The main CPU 201 is S based on the control status number read in the process of S3292.
The process after 3293 is performed.

In S3293, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display start processing of a normal symbol. The process of S3293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3294.

In this variable display start processing of a normal symbol, when various random value values are stored as start information in the normal symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 has "normal symbol hit determination processing", "ordinary symbol determination processing", and "ordinary symbol determination processing". "Design variation pattern determination process" and "normal symbol time saving management process" are performed, and then a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" is performed. If the hit determination random value of the normal symbol is not extracted (when various random values are not stored in the normal symbol judgment area), the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol determination process, and the normal symbol are performed. The control state number of the normal symbol is held at "0" without performing the fluctuation pattern determination process and the like, and the game ball waits for the game ball to pass through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B.

In the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the variable display start process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 20
1 refers to the hit determination table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 117, and is based on the game state and the hit determination random value of the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol determination area, and the winning determination value data (“ordinary symbol”). "Hit" or "Loss") is decided.

In the normal symbol determination process in the variable display start process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 is
With reference to the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, based on the above-mentioned winning determination value data (result of the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol) and the symbol random value of the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol determination area, ""Select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol" is determined.

Further, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120 and is for selecting the normal symbol effect stored in the normal symbol determination area. Based on the random value, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the normal symbol are determined. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the normal symbol, and causes the normal symbol display unit 161 to start the variable display of the normal symbol.

In the time saving management process for normal figures in the variable display start processing of ordinary symbols, the time saving number counter is 1.
It is determined whether or not the above is the case, and if the time reduction counter is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction counter. As a result of the subtraction, if the time reduction counter = 0, the time reduction flag and the time reduction identification number are cleared, and the transition control from the time reduction gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed. If the time reduction counter is not 1 or more, the time reduction management process for normal drawing is terminated, and even if the time reduction counter is 1 or more, the subtraction result from the time reduction counter is 0. If not, the time saving management process for the current drawing is terminated without clearing the time saving flag and the time saving identification number.

In addition, in this embodiment, in any of the time-saving game states of A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the time-saving number counter is set to 1.
Is configured to be subtracted, but only in the case of the C time saving game state, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state are obtained. In this case, 1 may not be subtracted from the time reduction counter at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol.

In S3294, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display end process of a normal symbol. This process of S3294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3295.

In this variable display end processing of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, the control status number of the normal symbol is set to ". Set to "2". If the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1", and the process waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S3295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process. This S3
The process of 295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". If the control status number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 performs the process.
Move to 3296.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, hit or miss of the normal symbol). Then, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is the normal symbol hit, the opening pattern (opening number of times, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is set, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to ". Set to "3". On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the open pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146.

Further, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 in the normal symbol game determination process, the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 119 is referred to, and based on the game state and the normal symbol hit time selection symbol command, The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 is the determined ordinary electric accessory 3
Sub CPU30 issues the opening pattern command of the ordinary electric accessory corresponding to the opening pattern of 146.
Send to 1.

In S3296, the main CPU 201 normally performs an electric accessory opening process. This S3
The process of 296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control status number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 performs the process.
Move to 3297.

In this ordinary electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 determined in the ordinary symbol game determination process of S3295. Then, when the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the ordinary symbol is set to "5".

In S3297, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit termination process. This S3
The process of 297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes the normal symbol per-end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol per-end processing, the main CPU 201 is the above-mentioned S3293 to S32.
A process of resetting (clearing) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in 96 and various random value stored in the normal symbol determination area is performed.

As described above, the hit determination process of the normal symbol is set to the gaming state when the variable display time of the normal symbol is set (when the variable display of the normal symbol is disclosed) in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S3293. The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is determined based on the above S.
In the normal symbol game determination process of 3295, the determination is made based on the game state when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol). Therefore, if the gaming state is changed while the variable display of the normal symbol is being performed, the normal symbol will be based on different gaming states at the time of disclosure of the variable display of the normal symbol and at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol. The hit determination and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 146 will be determined.

[5-4-15. Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 in S320 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is provided with a holding function for holding up to a predetermined number of starting information of ordinary symbols and special symbols until the starting conditions are satisfied, as compared with the first pachinko gaming machine. However, the processing contents of the starting opening winning detection process and the ball passage detection process are partially different. Further, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the large winning opening count switch 3132, the V attacker count switch 3153, and the V winning opening switch 315 are compared with the first pachinko gaming machine.
Since the configuration of 6 is added, a part of such processing is added.

First, the main CPU 201 executes the first start opening winning detection process (S3381). After executing the process of S3381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3382.

In this first start port winning detection process, the main CPU 201 is the first start port switch 3.
When the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is detected by 121, the first starting port 3120
The payout information according to the above is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in one first special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty area in one first special symbol determination area, various random value values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the first special symbol) are used as start information of the first special symbol. The symbol random value of the symbol, the random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, and various random values such as the random value for effect selection of the first special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various random values are used as one first. Stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free area in one first special symbol determination area, the first start opening winning detection process is terminated without extracting various random value values.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes the second start opening winning detection process (S3382). After executing the process of S3382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3383.

In this second start port winning detection process, the main CPU 201 is the second start port switch 3.
When the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 3140 is detected by 141, the second starting port 3140
The payout information according to the above is set, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in one second special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty area in one second special symbol determination area, various random number values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a second special) are used as start information of the second special symbol. Extract the symbol random value of the symbol, the random value for reach determination of the second special symbol, and various random values such as the random value for selecting the effect of the second special symbol), and use the extracted various random values as one second. Stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free area in one second special symbol determination area, the second start opening winning detection process is terminated without extracting various random value values.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the hit determination process of the second special symbol, only one first special symbol determination area and the second special symbol determination area are provided. It does not have the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) for holding the start information of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S3383). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S3383, the main CPU 201 performs the process S338.
Move to 4.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S3384). In the large winning opening passage detection process, when the large winning opening count switch 3132 detects that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 3131, the main CPU 201 sets the payout information according to the large winning opening 3131 and sets the payout information. 1 is added to and updated to the large winning opening counter for counting the number of winning balls of the game ball to the large winning opening 3131. After executing the process of S3384, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3385.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a V attacker passage detection process (S3385). In the V attacker passage detection process, the main CPU 201 is the large winning opening count switch 3132.
When the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 3131 is detected, the payout information according to the V winning device 3150 (opening / closing winning opening 3151) is set, and the payout information is set to the V winning device 3150 (opening / closing winning opening 3151). 1 is added to and updated to the V attacker winning counter for counting the number of winning balls of the game ball. After executing the process of S3385, the main CPU 201 performs the process S33.
Move to 86.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs the V winning opening passage detection process (S3386). In the V winning opening passage detection process, the main CPU 201 uses the V winning opening switch 3156 to press the V winning opening 3
When the passage of the game ball to 155 is detected, the V winning opening passage flag is turned on. Even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155, the payout information is not set. Main CPU 20
1 transfers the process to S3387 after executing the process of S3386.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S3387). In the ball passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A or the second passage gate 3126B is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B, one normal symbol determination area is used. Determine if there is free space in. Main CPU 2
When 01 determines that there is an empty area in one normal symbol determination area, various random value values (for example, a random value for hit determination of a normal symbol, a symbol random value of a normal symbol, and a normal symbol) are used as start information of the normal symbol. Various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted, and the extracted various random values are stored in one normal symbol start determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no empty area in one normal symbol start determination area, the ball passage detection process is terminated without extracting various random value values.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process of the ordinary symbol, only one ordinary symbol determination area is provided, and the start information of the ordinary symbol is reserved until the start condition is satisfied. It does not have a start storage area (1) to a normal symbol start storage area (4).

[5-5. Transition diagram of game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 136 is an example of a gaming state transition diagram showing the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in the present embodiment, left-handed is a normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed is the normal game mode in the A time-shortened game state and the B time-shortened game state. also,
In the C time-saving game state, the game mode of left-handed and right-handed changes as appropriate depending on the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the game state is changed when the game ball enters the first start port 3120, and the second start port 3 is performed in the A time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state.
When the game ball enters 140, the game state is changed. Further, in the C time saving game state, the game state is changed when the game ball enters the first start port 3120 or the game ball enters the second start port 3140. .. In the following, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the first start port 3120 in the normal game state, and that the game ball has entered the second start port 3140 in the A time reduction game state and the B time reduction game state. I will explain as a premise.

As shown in FIG. 136, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 in a normal gaming state, it is determined to be a "big hit", a "feature opening hit", or a "time saving hit" (see FIG. 110).
..

In the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and the "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

Further, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 3120 and the "feature opening hit" is determined, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening 3155, the game shifts to the big hit game state.
When the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 3155, the game state is not changed and the normal game state is maintained.

As described above, even if the game ball enters the first starting opening 3120 and the "feature opening hit" is determined, the opening mode of the V winning device 3150 (opening / closing winning opening 3151) is for the player. It is extremely difficult to shift to the jackpot gaming state because of the disadvantageous opening mode. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and the "feature opening hit" is determined, the game state is not substantially changed and the normal game state is maintained. ..

Then, after shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the A time saving gaming state is performed.

As the end condition of the A time reduction game state, the A time reduction game state is "end 100 times of time reduction number of times (FIG. 1).
12) ”and“ transition to the jackpot game state ”are satisfied.

Here, "the end of 100 times of time reduction" means "the total number of variable displays of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol is counted 100 times".

In addition, in this embodiment, "the end of 100 times of time reduction" means "the total number of variable display of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol is counted 100 times", but "the special symbol is counted 100 times". One of the conditions of "variable display of the normal symbol is performed 100 times" and "variable display of the normal symbol is performed 100 times" may be satisfied, or "variable display of the special symbol is 100 times".
It may be only "to be done once".

Then, when the game shifts to the big hit gaming state in the A time saving game state (the consecutive villas in the A time saving gaming state), the number of limiters is counted, and if the limiter number is reached, the game shifts to the normal gaming state.
If the number of limiters has not been reached, the game shifts to the A time saving game state again.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 3120 and the "time saving hit" is determined, the game shifts to the C time saving gaming state.

As the end condition of the C time reduction game state, the C time reduction game state is "end once the number of time reductions (FIG. 112).
(Refer to) ”and“ Transition to the jackpot game state ”are satisfied.

Here, "end of time reduction once" means "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once" and ".
It means that one of the conditions of "the variable display of the normal symbol is counted once" is satisfied. Further, in the present embodiment, the counting of the "time reduction number of times" is performed when the special symbol or the normal symbol is variablely displayed, and if the game state is not shifted to the jackpot game state, the first special symbol is counted. When the variable display is performed, or when the first variable display of the normal symbol is performed, the C time saving game state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state.

Further, after the transition from the C time reduction gaming state to the big hit gaming state, the transition to the A time reduction gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the normal game state, when the variable display number of special symbols (for example, the ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), the normal game state is changed to the B time reduction game state.

The B time saving game state is set as a condition for ending the B time saving game state, "a specified number of times (for example, 1212).
It is set that either of the conditions of "end of variable display of special symbol" and "transition to big hit game state" is satisfied.

In the B time saving game state, when "the end of the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times" is established, B
It shifts from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Further, after the transition from the B time reduction gaming state to the big hit gaming state, the transition to the A time reduction gaming state is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state.

In the present embodiment, there are three time-saving game states, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, as the time-saving game state, but the B time-saving game state is not provided.
It may be configured to have two time-saving gaming states, A time-saving gaming state and C time-saving gaming state.

[5-6. Opening mode of ordinary electric accessory]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the variable display time of the special symbol is set when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit" in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. By adjusting, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 can be changed. Hereinafter, an example of the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 will be described.

FIG. 137 is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the normal gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 138 is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the C time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

FIGS. 137 and 138 show the fluctuation and stop of the normal symbol display unit 161, the fluctuation and stop of the first special symbol display unit 163, and the solenoid for general electric use 3148 constituting the normal electric accessory 3146.
The operation and stop of the game and the transition of the gaming state are shown above and below.

Further, FIGS. 137 and 138 are premised on the premise that the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit" and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit". Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the normal game state and the C time reduction game state is 1000 as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbol in FIG. 120.
It is fixed at 0 msec (10 s).

Further, in FIGS. 137 and 138, as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. 119, the opening time (200 msec) of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal gaming state.
) Is short and the disadvantageous opening mode is shown as "short opening", and the advantageous opening mode in which the opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the C time short game state is long is shown as "long opening". .. Further, the type of the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed corresponding to the "time saving hit" is shown as "stop at C time saving symbol".

In FIG. 137 (a), in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal gaming state of FIG. 113, and the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol. This is an example of a time chart when "chance fluctuation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 137 (a), since the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, the game is played after the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (after the variation of the normal symbol ends). The state has shifted from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. 119, the normal electric motor is used. As an opening mode of the accessory 3146, "short opening" in a normal gaming state is performed.

In FIG. 137 (b), in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal gaming state of FIG. 113, and the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. This is an example of a time chart when "chance fluctuation B" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b), since the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, the game is played before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (before the variation of the normal symbol ends). The state has shifted from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the gaming state is the C time-shortened gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table of FIG. 119, it is normal. As an opening mode of the electric accessory 3146, "long opening" is performed in the C time-shortening gaming state.

Here, FIG. 137 (b) shows an opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 when "fz1" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command in the C time saving game state.
The operation of the solenoid 3148 for general electric power once (one opening) is illustrated. When "fz2" or "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command in the C time saving game state, the solenoid for general electric use 3148 is operated twice with a wait time in between. This also applies to FIG. 138 (b) described later.

In FIG. 138 (a), in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the C time saving game state of FIG. 114, and the variable display time of the special symbol is higher than the variable display time of the normal symbol. Is also an example of a time chart when a long "chance fluctuation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the variable display of the special symbol is performed once in the C time reduction game state, the end condition of the C time reduction game state (end of one time reduction number of times) is satisfied, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-shortening gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. While the special symbol is variablely displayed, it is in the normal gaming state, but after the variable display of the special symbol ends and "stops at the C time saving symbol", the normal gaming state is changed to the C time saving gaming state again. It will be migrated.

Since the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the C time reduction after the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (after the variation of the normal symbol ends). It has shifted to the game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. 119, the normal electric motor is used. As an opening mode of the accessory 3146, "short opening" in a normal gaming state is performed.

In FIG. 138 (b), in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the C time saving game state of FIG. 114, and the variable display time of the special symbol is higher than the variable display time of the normal symbol. Is also an example of a time chart when a short "chance fluctuation B" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the variable display of the special symbol is performed once in the C time reduction game state, the end condition of the C time reduction game state (end of the time reduction number of times once) is satisfied, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-shortening gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. While the special symbol is variablely displayed, it is in the normal gaming state, but after the variable display of the special symbol ends and "stops at the C time saving symbol", the normal gaming state is changed to the C time saving gaming state again. It will be migrated.

Since the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, the gaming state is shortened from the normal gaming state to the C time before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (before the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol). It has shifted to the game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the gaming state is the C time-shortened gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table of FIG. 119, it is normal. As an opening mode of the electric accessory 3146, "long opening" is performed in the C time-shortening gaming state.

Further, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the "end of one time reduction number of times", which is one of the end conditions of the C time reduction game state, is "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once. In addition to ", the condition is that" the variable display of ordinary symbols is counted once ". Therefore, FIG. 13
As shown in 7 (a) and FIG. 138 (a), when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and then the C time shortening game state is entered, a right-handed game is performed as an unintended game and the game ball is passed through the second passage gate. Even if it is passed through 3126B, the gaming state is changed from the C time shortening gaming state to the normal gaming state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and an unintended "long opening" is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146. Can be prevented.

As described above, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the hit determination process of the normal symbol is determined based on the gaming state when the normal symbol is variablely displayed (at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol). Then, the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is set when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is completed (
Since it will be determined based on the game state (at the end of the change of the normal symbol), there is a new interest in changing or maintaining the game state while the variable display of the normal symbol is being performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving it.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol, by adjusting the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time reduction hit". It is possible to change and maintain the game state while the variable display of the normal symbol is intentionally performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is variable for the normal symbol. A predetermined variation pattern table of a plurality of special symbols having different selection rates between "chance variation A" longer than the display time and "chance variation B" whose variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is provided. Since the variable pattern table of the special symbol is switched according to the change condition of the above, it is possible to make the player interested in switching the variable pattern table of the special symbol and further improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as a predetermined change condition, based on the information of the symbol (small hit symbol switching information) stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 163 when it is determined to be "a hit for opening the accessory". Since the variable pattern table of the special symbol can be switched, it is possible to make the player interested in the "character open hit" and the small hit symbol switching information, and to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the second starting port 31
When the game ball enters the 40, it is easier to shift to the big hit game state from the first route or the second route than when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120. In particular, in this embodiment,
When the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is possible to substantially shift to the big hit game state. For this reason, as an opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146, the value for the "long opening" that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 3140 is increased, and the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is made more interested. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the limiter function is provided in the present embodiment, even if the consecutive villas in the A time-saving gaming state are terminated by the operation of the limiter function and the game shifts to the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated In the first hit determination process of the special symbol, the variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 is selected. The variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 is a specific variation pattern table in which an advantageous chance variation B in which "long opening" is likely to be performed as an opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in a normal gaming state is easily selected. Therefore, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time saving hit", the transition to the jackpot gaming state via the second route can be performed again. , It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the operation of the limiter function.

Further, in the present embodiment, "the end of one time reduction number of times", which is one of the end conditions of the C time reduction game state, is set to "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once", and the special symbol is variable. Since it is configured so that the game state can be changed by subtracting the number of time reductions when the display is performed, the probability that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol will be "time reduction hits" is increased. However, it is possible to prevent an adverse effect that the time-saving game state is always controlled, and it is possible to maintain the game playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, "1 time reduction number of times 1", which is one of the end conditions of the C time reduction game state.
"End of round" is intended in the C time saving game state because "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once" and "the variable display of the normal symbol is counted once" is also a condition. Even if a right-handed game is performed and the game ball is passed through the second passage gate 3126B, the game state is changed from the C time reduction game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal electric accessory is used. It is possible to prevent an unintended "long opening" from being performed as the opening mode of the 3146.

Further, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passage gate 3126B
Is located below the ordinary electric accessory unit 3145 in the right area 107.
Even if the game ball happens to flow down the right side region 107 and the game ball passes through the second passage gate 3126B in the C short game state, the game ball is prevented from unintentionally entering the normal electric accessory 3146. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 3120 is arranged close to directly under the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting port 3120. It will be a ball, and the fluctuation start time of the normal symbol triggered by the passage of the game ball to the first passing gate 3126A and the fluctuation start of the special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120. It is possible to coordinate with the time (variable display can be started at about the same time).

<Second Embodiment of the Fourth Pachinko Game Machine>
Next, a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is different from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and has a predetermined number of configuration of the gaming board unit (arrangement of passing gates) and starting information of ordinary symbols and special symbols. It differs depending on the end condition of the time-saving gaming state in that it has a hold function to hold until.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are used for the same configuration requirements as those of the first pachinko gaming machine and the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A detailed description of the configuration and processing will be omitted.

[6-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 139, the gaming board unit 4 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
010 will be described. The base door 3 (FIG. 2) of the gaming board unit 4010 is also located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first embodiment of the first pachinko gaming machine and the fourth pachinko gaming machine. See) placed in front of.

FIG. 139 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The game board unit 4010 includes a game panel 4100, various members are arranged on the game panel 4100, and a game area 105 on which a launched game ball can roll and flow is formed on the front surface of the game panel 4100. ..

As shown in FIG. 139, the gaming board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is the gaming board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
The difference is mainly that the right side region 107 is not provided with the second passage gate 3126B of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passage gate 31 is in the right side region 107.
The reason why the 26B is not provided is that the right-handed game ball passes through the second passage gate 3126B due to the holding function of holding the start information of the normal symbol and the special symbol up to a predetermined number, and the normal symbol is not provided. This is to prevent the variable display time between the normal symbol and the special symbol from being unable to be adjusted because the reserved number of only is stored.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 139, the LED unit 160 is provided with a hold display unit 162 for ordinary symbols, a hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol, and a hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol. But it's different.

[6-2. Electrical configuration]
The control circuit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine also has a control circuit of the gaming ball to the second passage gate 3126B as compared with the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine (FIG. 109). The configuration of the second passage gate switch 3127B for detecting passage has been deleted, and the hold display unit 162 for ordinary symbols, the hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol, and the hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine have been deleted. Since the configuration of is only added, detailed description will be omitted.

Further, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, since the holding function for holding the start information of the normal symbol or the special symbol up to a predetermined number is provided, the main RAM 203 has a predetermined number of start information of the normal symbol. Normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4) for holding up to, and first special symbol start storage area (1) to 1st for holding up to a predetermined number of special symbol start information. Special symbol start storage area (4) and second special symbol start storage area (1) to second
It has a special symbol start storage area (4).

[6-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142, the basic specifications of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described.

The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is mainly for the special symbol in order to synchronize the fluctuation time between the special symbol and the normal symbol as compared with the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols, etc. are different.

Further, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, as the end condition of the A time saving gaming state, "
It is set that either of the conditions of "end of 100 times of time reduction" and "transition to the big hit game state" is satisfied, but "end of 100 times of time reduction" does not count the variable display of the normal symbol. It is set to "the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times". Similarly, as the end condition of the C time reduction game state, it is set that either the condition of "end of time reduction once" or "transition to the big hit game state" is satisfied, but "time reduction number 1". "End of round" is set to "variable display of special symbol is performed once" without counting the variable display of normal symbols.

Further, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the hit determination table (FIG. 110), the special symbol determination table (FIG. 111), and the hit type of the special symbol of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine are determined. Since it is common to the table (FIG. 112), the normal symbol hit determination table (FIG. 117), the ordinary symbol determination table (FIG. 118), and the ordinary symbol hit type determination table (FIG. 119), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[6-3-1. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 140 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state and the C time saving gaming state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 141 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Since the variation pattern table of the special symbols of the A time-saving gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state is the same as that of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the description thereof will be omitted. The variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 shows the type of the special symbol and the type of the special symbol.
The result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the random value for effect selection, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 determines a variation pattern table of the special symbol according to the game state, etc., refers to the determined variation pattern table of the special symbol, and selects the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and the effect selection. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the random value. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the "Remarks" column of FIGS. 140 and 141, "special electric accessory opening end time" and "special figure processing end time" are described as reference.

The "special electric accessory opening end time" is the opening / closing winning opening 3 that is opened at the time of "approach opening of the accessory".
It means the opening time of 151. As explained in the hit type determination table of FIG. 112, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "winning of the accessory opening", and in this embodiment, the opening / closing prize is given as the disadvantageous "first opening mode". Since the opening time of the mouth 3151 is 200 msec, the "special electric accessory opening end time" is shown as "200 msec".

The "special symbol processing end time" means the time from the start to the end of the special symbol management process shown in FIG. 122 for the start information of one special symbol. Specifically, it means the time from the special symbol variable display start processing (special symbol control state number = 0) of FIG. 123 to the execution of the special symbol game end processing of FIG. 128.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state and C time reduction game state)
The variation pattern table TC1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 140 is used after the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine has been backed up and cleared, or after the selection symbol command “z” for “per opening of the accessory”.
It is a fluctuation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to "4" is stopped and displayed.

The variation pattern table TC2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command “z5” of the “feature opening” is stopped and displayed.

The variation pattern table TC3 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command “z6” of the “feature opening” is stopped and displayed.

In the variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 140, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is the variable display time of the normal symbol (13300 or 13500 msec). ) Either the above fluctuation pattern "01H""chance fluctuation A" or the fluctuation pattern "02H" whose variable display time is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol "chance fluctuation B". Is selected.

Also in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in the normal gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, from the relationship with the variable display time of the normal symbol. In the chance variation A, the second starting port 3140 tends to be in an unfavorable opening mode due to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3146, and in the short chance variation B, the opening mode in which the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3146. It is easy to become.

Further, the variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 of the special symbols shown in FIGS. 140 (1) to 140 (3).
As in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the selection rates of the chance variation A and the chance variation B are different. Second start port 3140 in the normal game state and the C time reduction game state
The chance variation B, which tends to be an advantageous opening mode, is the variation pattern table T1 of the special symbol.
<Special symbol variation pattern table T2 <Special symbol variation pattern table T3 is easily selected in this order.

Therefore, among the variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 of the special symbol, the variation pattern table TC3 of the special symbol is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player, but as described above, the selection symbol command is , "Z6"<"z5"<"z4" are easily selected, so that the variation pattern table TC3 of the special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is most difficult to be selected.

Further, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the "special figure processing end time" in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIGS. 140 (1) to 140 (3) is set. Focusing on it, it has the following features.

The "special symbol processing end time" of the special symbol variation pattern (01H) of the disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined to be a "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "1350".
The variable display time of the special symbol is set so as to be "0 msec".

In addition, the "special symbol processing end time" of the special symbol variation pattern (0BH) when it is determined as "a hit for opening the accessory" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "13500 msec".
The variable display time of the special symbol is set so as to be.

That is, the fluctuation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined as "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the "feature release" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. "Hit" with the fluctuation pattern (0BH) of the special symbol when it is determined
The variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the "special symbol processing end time" is the same time.

Here, the variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined as "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the "feature" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. The variation pattern (0BH) of the special symbol when it is determined to be "open hit" is a variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to "substantially special symbol loss" in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. And the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol that substantially corresponds to the special symbol loss (
For 01H and 0BH), the variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the "special symbol processing end time" is the same.

(Variation pattern table of special symbol after the limiter function is activated)
The variation pattern table ZC1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 141 (1) is a specific variation pattern table selected in the first hit determination process of the special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. be.

In the variation pattern table ZC1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 141 (1), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the second start opening 3 is in the normal gaming state.
It is configured so that the chance variation B, in which 140 tends to be an advantageous opening mode, is always selected.

Similar to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, chance fluctuation B in the normal gaming state
When is selected, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous opening mode, and the game ball becomes the second starting port 31.
It becomes easier to enter 40. Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the game ball easily shifts to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball becomes the second. By entering the starting port 3140, it is possible to substantially shift to the big hit game state.

Therefore, even if the consecutive villas in the time-saving game state are terminated by the operation of the limiter function, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state is "time-saving hit", it will be repeated. Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the operation of the limiter function.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern table ZC1 of the special symbol is configured so that the chance variation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit". The chance variation A, in which the second starting port 3140 tends to have an unfavorable opening mode, may be selected with a lower probability than the chance variation B.

The variation pattern table ZC2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (2) is a modification of the variation pattern table ZC1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116 (1), and after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. It is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The variation pattern table ZC2 of the special symbol is configured so that the chance variation A is selected with a probability of 20% and the chance variation B is selected with a probability of 80% when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit". are doing.

Even in this way, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" after the transition to the normal gaming state, the probability of shifting to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the operation of the limiter function.

The fluctuation pattern tables ZC1 and ZC2 of the special symbols are the fluctuation pattern tables selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. Not limited to the first time, for example, when the start information of the special symbol is held up to a specific number of holds (for example, 4) corresponding to the hold function of the special symbol, the hit determination process of the special symbol up to the specific number of holds is performed. It may be a variation pattern table selected based on the above, or it may be a variation pattern table selected based on a hit determination process of a special symbol up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the chance variation A and the chance variation B are set to one, but it is special based on the variable display time of the normal symbol. Even if a plurality of chance fluctuation A groups whose variable display time of a symbol is longer than the variable display time of a normal symbol and a plurality of chance fluctuation B groups whose variable display time of a special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of a normal symbol are provided. good.

[6-3-2. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 142 is an example of a variation pattern table of ordinary symbols in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 142 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The variation pattern table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 142 shows the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 3126A. The random value for effect selection, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol are associated with each other. In addition, the random value for normal symbol effect selection is, for example, 0 to 99 (
It is extracted from 100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the normal symbol, and extracts the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate 3126A. Based on the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the normal symbol are determined. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the column of "remarks" in FIG. 142, "game state at the end of variable display", "normal electric accessory opening end time", and "normal drawing processing end time" are described as reference.

The "game state at the end of the variable display" means the game state when the variable display of the normal symbol ends, and may be different from the game state when the variable display of the normal symbol is started. note that,"
The "game state at the end of the variable display" includes the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, but since they have little relation to the game playability of the present embodiment, the description in the remarks is omitted.

"Ordinary electric accessory opening end time" is the end time of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 (
It means the first opening time + wait time + second opening time). As explained in the normal symbol hit type determination table of FIG. 119, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state, only the first opening time of 200 msec is the normal electric accessory. It will be the opening end time. Further, in the C time saving game state, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", as described in the normal symbol hit type determination table of FIG. 119, the first opening time and the wait time. 250, which is the total of the second opening time
Any one of 0 msec, 4600 msec, and 5600 msec is the normal electric accessory opening end time.

The "normal symbol processing end time" means the time from the start to the end of the ordinary symbol control process shown in FIG. 134 with respect to the start information of one ordinary symbol.

In particular, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, focusing on the "normal drawing processing end time" in the "remarks" column of the variation pattern table of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 142, it has the following features. ing.

When the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time reduction game state, the variation pattern (01H) of the normal symbol when it is determined as "normal symbol hit" in the hit determination process of the normal symbol is , The variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that the "normal symbol processing end time" when the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state is "13500 msec".

Further, when the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (02H) when it is determined as "normal symbol loss" in the hit determination process of the normal symbol. In), the variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that the "normal symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec" regardless of the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Here, when the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal gaming state or the C time shortening gaming state, and the gaming state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal gaming state, in the hit determination process of the normal symbol. Even if it is determined to be "normal symbol hit", as shown in FIG. 119, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is a disadvantageous opening mode. In addition, the fact that the hit determination process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss" also means that the normal electric accessory 3146 does not operate.
Naturally, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Therefore, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time reduction game state, although it is determined as "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol hit determination process, the variable display of the normal symbol ends. The fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (predetermined 01H) in which the game state at the time becomes the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (02H) when it is determined as "normal symbol loss" in the hit determination process of the normal symbol. Is a variation pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss" which is disadvantageous to the player. Then, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that all the fluctuation patterns of the normal symbol corresponding to "substantially the normal symbol loss" have the same "normal symbol processing end time".

Then, when the variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 and the variation pattern table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 142 are compared, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to "substantially the special symbol loss" is ". Special figure processing end time (13500 msec) "(
(See FIGS. 140 and 141) and the "normal figure processing end time (13500 msec)" (see FIG. 142) in the variation pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss" are configured to be the same time. Has been done.

As a result, as will be described later using FIG. 143, even if the hold function for holding the start information of the normal symbol or the special symbol up to a predetermined number is provided, the deviation of the variable display start time between the normal symbol and the special symbol is suppressed. can do.

[6-4. Main control process]
In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 20 of the main control circuit 200
The various processes (various modules) executed by 1 are the processes for performing the hold function of holding the start information of the normal symbol or the special symbol up to a predetermined number as compared with the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The difference is that the number of time reductions is not subtracted when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, but the same applies to other processes. The processing for performing this holding function is the same as that of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, but the differences will be described with reference to the drawings used in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

(Special symbol variable display start processing)
In the special symbol variable display start processing (see FIG. 123) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S3021).
YES), the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed using the start information (random value for big hit determination of the special symbol, etc.) stored in the special symbol determination area (S3022). However, in the special symbol variable display start processing in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3021), "the special symbol After performing the "start information shift process", the hit determination process (S3022) of the special symbol is performed.

Specifically, in the "special symbol start information shift process", when the special symbol variable display start process targets the first special symbol, the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is set. The stored start information is shifted to the special symbol determination area, and the start information stored in the first special symbol start storage area (2) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1st special symbol start storage area (4). 1) -Shift to the first special symbol start storage area (3). When the special symbol variable display start processing targets the second special symbol, the first special symbol start storage area (
1) When the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) instead of the first special symbol start storage area (4) targets the first special symbol for processing. It will be shifted as well.

(Ordinary symbol control processing)
In the variable display start processing (S3293) of the normal symbol of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, various random value values are stored as start information in the normal symbol determination area. If so, the hit determination process of the normal symbol is performed. However,
In the variable display start processing of the normal symbol in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine,
Similar to the above "start information shift processing of special symbol", after the start information shift processing of the normal symbol is performed, if various random numbers are stored as start information in the normal symbol determination area, the hit determination process of the normal symbol is performed. Will do. Further, in the variable display start processing (S3293) of the normal symbol of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 134), the "time saving management process for normal symbols" in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is not performed. become.

(Switch input detection process)
Switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 135).
In the first start opening winning detection process (S3381), the second start opening winning detection process (S3382), and the ball passage detection process (S3387), the extracted start information is combined into one special symbol determination area or normal symbol start determination area. Processing is performed so that it can be memorized. However, in the special symbol variable display start processing in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the second special symbol Start storage area (1) to 2nd special symbol start storage area (4), 1st special symbol start storage area (1) to 1st special symbol start storage area (4), normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal The start information is stored while referring to the empty space of the symbol start storage area (4). This is the same as the first pachinko gaming machine.

[6-5. Opening mode of ordinary electric accessory]
FIG. 143 is a time chart showing an example of an opening mode of a normal electric accessory in a normal gaming state or a C time saving gaming state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 143 shows the fluctuation and stop of the normal symbol display unit 161, the operation and stop of the solenoid for general use 3148 constituting the normal electric accessory 3146, the fluctuation and stop of the first special symbol display unit 163, and the gaming state. The transition is shown above and below.

Further, in FIG. 143, as shown in the ordinary symbol per type determination table of FIG. 119, the disadvantageous opening mode in which the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the normal gaming state is short (200 msec) is referred to as “short opening”. Shown, the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in the C time saving game state
An advantageous opening mode in which the opening time is long (2000 to 3000 msec) is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed corresponding to "time saving hit" is shown as "stop at C time saving symbol", and the opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 3151 that is opened at the time of "character opening hit" is shown. Is illustrated as "the end time of opening the character".

At the time of (a) in FIG. 143, the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed for the first time are shown, and when the gaming state is the C time saving gaming state, the normal symbol display unit 161 displays the "normal symbol". The variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "loss" is started, and the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to "per opening of the accessory" is started in the first special symbol display unit 163. also,
With the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the gaming state shifts from the C time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Although the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to "per opening of the accessory" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "normal symbol loss", the variable display time of the first special symbol is "special electric". The "special figure processing end time" to which the "character opening end time" is added is set to the same time as the "normal figure processing end time" in the normal symbol.

Therefore, at the time of (a) in FIG. 143, the time is set to be the same as the "special figure processing end time" in the first special symbol and the "normal figure processing end time" in the normal symbol.
The fluctuation start time of the first special symbol and the normal symbol, which are variably displayed at the time, is substantially synchronized.

At the time of (a) in FIG. 143, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the normal symbol display unit 161 starts the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", and the first
In the special symbol display unit 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to the “time saving hit” is started.

The variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to the "time saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", and the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended. Later, the variable display time of the first special symbol ends, and the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "per normal symbol" ends,
The variable display time of the first special symbol has not ended, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state. FIG. 11
As shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table of 9, "short opening" in the normal gaming state is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory.

The variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to the "time saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", but the variable display time of the normal symbol. The "normal symbol processing end time", which is the sum of the "short release" time, which is the "ordinary electric accessory opening end time", is set to the same time as the "special symbol processing end time" in the first special symbol. ..

Therefore, even in the time (c) of FIG. 143, the time is set to be the same as the "special figure processing end time" in the first special symbol and the "normal figure processing end time" in the normal symbol.
The fluctuation start time of the first special symbol and the normal symbol, which are variably displayed for the third time, is substantially synchronized.

At the time (c) of FIG. 143, when the gaming state is the C time shortening gaming state, the normal symbol display unit 161 starts the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "normal symbol hit", and the first special In the symbol display unit 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the “time saving hit” is started. Further, with the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the gaming state shifts from the C time reduction gaming state to the normal gaming state.

In the period (d) of FIG. 143, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance fluctuation B corresponding to the "time saving hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit". , The variable display time of the first special symbol ends immediately before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, and the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time saving gaming state.

At the time of (e) in FIG. 143, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit" ends, the variable display time of the first special symbol has already ended and the gaming state changes to the C time reduction gaming state. As shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table of FIG. 119, "long opening" in the C time-shortening gaming state is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory.

As described above, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in addition to the configuration that exerts the effect in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, a special symbol corresponding to "substantially special symbol loss" is obtained. "Special symbol processing end time" in the fluctuation pattern (01H, 0BH) and "normal symbol processing end time" in the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss"
And are configured to be at the same time (FIGS. 140 to 142). As a result, even if the hold function for holding the start information of the normal symbol or the special symbol up to a predetermined number is provided, it is possible to suppress the time lag between the normal symbol and the special symbol until the big hit.

<Modification example of the fourth pachinko machine>
Next, a modified example of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3 while the gaming ball flowing down from the left side region 106 collides with the gaming nail.
It is configured to allow direct passage / entry into 120. However, the first passage gate 312
In order to pass / enter the 6A and the first starting port 3120, only the game ball in which the game ball enters a sorting device (for example, a so-called croon or the like) and is sorted to a specific discharge port by the sorting device. May be configured to pass / enter the first pass gate 3126A and the first start port 3120. For example, using the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 as a distribution device, the game balls that have entered the warp entrance 117 are configured to be distributed to a plurality of discharge ports (not shown) by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to a specific discharge port. Only the sorted game balls are the first
It may be configured to pass / enter the passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120.
In particular, when the hold function for holding the start information of the normal symbol or the special symbol up to a predetermined number is not provided as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the first passage gate per unit time is not provided. Even if the passage / entry rate to the 3126A and the first starting port 3120 is lowered, the distribution device can maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed, the variable display time of the special symbol predetermined in the variable pattern table of the special symbol is set. It was configured to determine, but when determining the variable display time of the special symbol, it is configured to determine the variable display time of the special symbol based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed. You may. For example, when the "chance fluctuation B" of the special symbol advantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol, which is shorter than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed, is calculated. Then (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol-1 second), the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation B. If the special symbol "chance fluctuation A" that is disadvantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol, which is longer than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed, is calculated. (For example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol + 1 second)
, The calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation A. especially,
When a hold function for holding the start information of a normal symbol or a special symbol up to a predetermined number is provided, it is effective because the end time of the variable display time between the normal symbol and the special symbol can be adjusted in real time.

Further, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passage gate 3126B is provided in the right side region 107 of the gaming board unit 3010, as shown in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the second passage gate 312 in the right area 107 of the gaming board unit 3010.
It is not necessary to provide 6B.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the number of time reductions is subtracted when the special symbol is variablely displayed, so that the time reduction gaming state can be shifted to the normal gaming state. However, as with the first to third pachinko gaming machines, even if the special symbol is variablely displayed and then the number of time reductions is subtracted, the time reduction game state can be changed to the normal game state. good.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (A time saving gaming state) is counted.
When the number of consecutive big hits reaches a predetermined number of limiters, the "limiter function" that partially regulates the game state that shifts after the end of the big hit game state is provided, but the limiter function may not be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the "winning of the accessory opening" is determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. but,
When the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, the "feature open hit" may not be determined.

(others)
The above-mentioned fourth pachinko gaming machine can apply each other's techniques to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiment does not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made to the extent that the claims do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the fourth pachinko gaming machine merely list the most preferable effects arising from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something.

Furthermore, the above [4. The extended example] is also applicable to the fourth pachinko gaming machine as long as there is no discrepancy in its playability and control.

Hereinafter, the techniques related to the present invention will be described.

<Appendix 1>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a symbol display device when the game ball enters the starting port, and the jackpot game state is controlled on condition that the display result is in a predetermined specific display mode. Based on the so-called type 1 type of pachinko gaming machine) and the entry of the gaming machine into the starting port, the movable member of the variable winning device (large winning opening) is changed from a state in which the game ball is difficult to win to a state in which it is easy to win. , A gaming machine that controls a jackpot gaming state on condition that a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning device enters a specific area provided in the variable winning device is known (so-called two types of gaming machines). ).

In addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening and starting opening, a passing gate for operating a normal symbol is provided in the game area, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed.
When the lottery of this ordinary symbol is won, the movable member (so-called electric tulip) provided at the specific starting port is opened.
And most of the gaming machines equipped with such movable members are to enhance the interest of the game.
It has a time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is easy to open per unit time, and a non-time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is difficult to open per unit time (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art document]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-273866

[Outline of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, for the operation of the movable member provided at the specific starting port, the game ball passes through the passage gate in the time-saving game state, or the game ball passes through the passage gate in the non-time-saving game state. I was only interested in whether it passed, and there were further improvements in order to improve the interest of the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the interest of gaming.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a gaming board (for example, a gaming panel 3100, 4100) in which a gaming region in which a gaming ball flows down is formed, and a starting region (for example, a starting region provided in the gaming region). For example, a starting area detecting means (for example, the first starting port switch 3121) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120) and a passing area (first) provided in the game area.
A passing area detecting means (for example, the first passing gate switch 3127A) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the passing gate 3126A), and an open state provided in the game area where the game ball is easily accepted and a closed state where the game ball is difficult to accept. Whether to change the start variable winning device from the closed state to the open state on condition that the game ball is detected by the variable starting variable winning device (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 3146) and the passing area detecting means. The normal game determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) that determines whether or not to open / close and the normal symbol display device are started to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device. An ordinary symbol display control means (for example, main CPU 201) that controls stop display, and an open mode determining means (for example, main CPU 201) that determines an open mode that changes the start variable winning device into the open state and the closed state. ), And when a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the normal symbol display control means, the start variable winning device is changed to the open state and the closed state by the open mode determined by the open mode determining means. There are special conditions (for example, the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed) triggered by the detection of the game ball by the start opening / closing control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that controls the opening / closing. When it is established, it is provided with a gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 201) that shifts to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a C time-saving gaming state) and controls the shifted gaming state.
The ordinary game determination means makes the opening / closing determination based on the game state when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started by the ordinary symbol display control means, and the opening mode determining means is the ordinary symbol display control means. It is characterized in that the opening mode can be determined based on the gaming state when the specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention uses a start variable winning device detecting means (for example, a second starting port switch 3141) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the starting variable winning device and the starting area detecting means. When the first transition condition (for example, when the stop display mode indicating "big hit" is derived) triggered by the detection of the game ball, the control of the special game advantageous to the player is performed. When the game ball is detected by the first special game control means (for example, the main CPU 201) and the start variable winning device detection means, the second transition condition (for example, the game ball that has entered the V attacker 3152) When the V winning opening is established), the second special game control means (for example, the main CPU 20) that controls the special game is established.
1) and
It is desirable that the second transition condition is set more easily to be satisfied than the first transition condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention determines whether or not to control a special game that is advantageous to the player, on condition that the gaming ball is detected by the starting area detecting means. Special symbol display control that causes the means (for example, the main CPU 201) and the special symbol display device to start variable display of the special symbol, and controls the special symbol display device to stop and display the special symbol after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed. Means (eg, main CPU 201) and
When the game state control means is determined not to control the special game by the special game determination means, and the special symbol display control means stops and displays a specific special symbol (for example, a C time saving symbol or the like). , Specific game state (for example, A time reduction game state, B time reduction game state and C
It is desirable to be able to control the specific gaming state by shifting to the time-saving gaming state) consisting of the time-saving gaming state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is the first of the special symbols, which is longer than the variable display time of the ordinary symbols.
Selection of the variable display time of each special symbol for the variable display time of a plurality of special symbols including at least the variable display time and the second variable display time of the special symbol shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. Multiple variable time tables with different rates (eg, FIGS. 113-1).
Depending on the fluctuation time table storage means (for example, main ROM 202) that stores the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol shown in 16, and the predetermined change conditions (for example, small hit symbol switching information, presence / absence of operation of the limiter function, etc.). , A variable time table determining means (for example, main CPU 201) for determining one variable time table from a plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means, and a special for determining the variable display time of a special symbol. A symbol variation time determining means (for example, main CPU 201) is provided.
It is desirable that the special symbol variation time determining means can determine the variable display time of the special symbol based on the variation time table determined by the variation time table determining means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a special symbol determining means (for example,) for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device according to the determination result by the special gaming determining means.
Main CPU201) and
When it is determined that the special symbol determining means controls the first special game capable of giving the first benefit by the special game determining means, the first special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) is determined. ) Is determined, and when it is determined that the control of the second special game capable of granting the second profit having a lower profit margin than the first profit is performed, the second special symbol (for example, , The symbol of the "feature opening hit" corresponding to the small hit symbol switching information) can be determined, and in the variable time table determining means, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means. Then, when determining the variable display time of the special symbol from the next time onward, a plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means (for example, the normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to (3)). It is possible to determine a special variation time table from the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbol and the variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the special symbol in the C time saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 114 (1) to (3). Is desirable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a special gaming number counting means (for example, main CPU 201) for counting the number of times the special gaming is controlled under a specific condition (A time saving gaming state).
) And,
When a specific number of times (for example, the number of limiters) is counted by the special game number counting means, the game state controlling means can shift to a normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, and the variable time table determining means When a specific number of times is counted by the special game number counting means, the second variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the first variable display time of the special symbol until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is desirable to be able to determine a specific variation time table (eg, variation pattern tables Z1, Z2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 116) with a high rate of execution.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game state control means stops and displays the specific special symbol (for example, the C time saving symbol) by the special symbol display control means, the specific gaming state (for example, the C time saving symbol) is displayed. For example, it is shifted to the time-saving game state consisting of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, mainly the C time-saving game state), and after the first end condition is satisfied (for example, for example).
When the control of the specific gaming state is terminated and the first special symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means in one special symbol variable display),
After the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state consisting of A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state, mainly A time-saving gaming state), and after the second end condition is satisfied (for example, It is desirable that the control of the specific gaming state is terminated after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol), and the termination condition is different between the first termination condition and the second termination condition.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming board is provided with the starting region in the gaming region in the traveling direction of the gaming ball that has passed through the passing region and in close proximity to the passing region. It is desirable that the gaming ball that has passed through the passing region is configured to be able to pass through the starting region.

〔The invention's effect〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

3100, 4100 Game panel 201 Main CPU
202 main ROM
203 Main ROM
3120 1st start port 3121 1st start port switch 3126A 1st pass gate 3126B 2nd pass gate 3127A 1st pass gate switch 3127B 2nd pass gate switch 3133 Special electric accessory 3140 2nd start port 3141 2nd start port switch 3146 Ordinary electric accessory 3150 V winning device 3155 V winning opening 3156 V winning opening switch

Claims (8)

A game board in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is formed,
A starting area detecting means for detecting the entry of a game ball into the starting area provided in the game area, and a starting area detecting means.
A passing area detecting means for detecting the entry of a game ball into a passing area provided in the game area, and a passing area detecting means.
A variable starting winning device provided in the game area and capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball is easily accepted and a closed state in which it is difficult to accept the game ball.
A normal game determining means that determines whether or not to change the start variable winning device from the closed state to the open state on condition that the game ball is detected by the passing area detecting means.
The normal symbol display device is started to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed,
A normal symbol display control means that controls the normal symbol display device to stop and display the normal symbol,
An opening mode determining means for determining an opening mode for changing the start variable winning device into the open state and the closed state,
When a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the normal symbol display control means, the opening / closing control for changing the start variable winning device into the open state and the closed state by the opening mode determined by the opening mode determining means. Starting open / close control means and
A game state control means for shifting to a predetermined game state and controlling the shifted game state by satisfying a special condition triggered by the detection of the game ball by the start area detecting means is provided. ,
The normal game determination means is
The opening / closing determination is performed based on the gaming state when the variable display of the normal symbol is started by the normal symbol display control means.
The opening mode determining means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the opening mode can be determined based on the gaming state when a specific ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed by the ordinary symbol display control means. A starting variable winning device detecting means for detecting the entry of a game ball into the starting variable winning device, and a starting variable winning device detecting means.
When the first transition condition is satisfied with the detection of the game ball by the start area detecting means, the first special game control means for controlling the special game advantageous to the player, and the first special game control means.
When the second transition condition is satisfied with the detection of the game ball by the start variable winning device detecting means, the second special game control means for controlling the special game is provided.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second transition condition is set more easily to be satisfied than the first transition condition. A special game determining means for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player on condition that the gaming ball is detected by the starting area detecting means.
The special symbol display device is started to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.
It is equipped with a special symbol display control means for controlling the special symbol display device to stop and display the special symbol.
When it is determined that the special game determination means does not control the special game and the special symbol display control means stops and displays the specific special symbol, the game state control means shifts to the specific game state. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the specific gaming state can be controlled. Variable display time of a plurality of special symbols including at least the first variable display time of the special symbol longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol and the second variable display time of the special symbol shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. On the other hand, a variable time table storage means for storing a plurality of variable time tables in which the selection rate of the variable display time of each special symbol is specified is different.
A variable time table determining means for determining one variable time table from a plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means according to a predetermined change condition.
It is equipped with a special symbol fluctuation time determining means for determining the variable display time of the special symbol.
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the special symbol variation time determining means can determine a variable display time of a special symbol based on a variation time table determined by the variation time table determining means. .. A special symbol determining means for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device according to the determination result by the special game determining means is provided.
When it is determined that the special symbol determining means controls the first special game to which the first benefit can be given by the special game determining means, the first special symbol is determined, and the above-mentioned special symbol is determined. It is possible to determine the second special symbol when it is determined that the control of the second special game capable of giving the second profit having a lower profit margin than the first profit is performed.
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the variable time table determining means determines the variable display time of the special symbol from the next time onward.
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein a special variable time table can be determined from a plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means. A special game number counting means for counting the number of times the special game is controlled under a specific condition is provided.
When a specific number of times is counted by the special game number counting means, the game state control means can shift to a normal game state which is disadvantageous to the player.
When a specific number of times is counted by the special game number counting means, the variable time table determining means is the first variable display time of the special symbol rather than the first variable display time of the special symbol until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 4 or 5, wherein a specific variable time table having a higher ratio of executing the variable display time can be determined. The game state control means
When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the process shifts to the specific gaming state, and after the first end condition is satisfied, the control of the specific gaming state is terminated.
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the process shifts to the specific gaming state, and after the second end condition is satisfied, the control of the specific gaming state is terminated.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 6, wherein the first end condition and the second end condition are different end conditions. The game board
The starting area is provided in the game area in the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the passing area and is close to the passing area.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the gaming ball that has passed through the passing region is configured to be able to pass through the starting region.

Images